Professional Documents
Culture Documents
m07508207 XXXXXXXX 0 en
m07508207 XXXXXXXX 0 en
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207(/xxx-xxx)
PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
PLC - Controller PFC200
Hansastraße 27
D-32423 Minden
E-Mail: [email protected]
Web: http://www.wago.com
Technical Support
E-Mail: [email protected]
Every conceivable measure has been taken to ensure the accuracy and
completeness of this documentation. However, as errors can never be fully
excluded, we always appreciate any information or suggestions for improving the
documentation.
E-Mail: [email protected]
We wish to point out that the software and hardware terms as well as the
trademarks of companies used and/or mentioned in the present manual are
generally protected by trademark or patent.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Table of Contents 3
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table of Contents
1 Notes about this Documentation ........................................................... 15
1.1 Validity of this Documentation............................................................... 15
1.2 Copyright ..............................................................................................15
1.3 Symbols ...............................................................................................16
1.4 Number Notation ..................................................................................18
1.5 Font Conventions .................................................................................18
2 Important Notes ......................................................................................19
2.1 Legal Bases..........................................................................................19
2.1.1 Subject to Changes .......................................................................... 19
2.1.2 Personnel Qualifications .................................................................. 19
2.1.3 Use of the WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 in Compliance with Underlying
Provisions ........................................................................................19
2.1.4 Technical Condition of Specified Devices......................................... 20
2.2 Safety Advice (Precautions) ................................................................. 21
2.3 Disclaimer.............................................................................................22
2.4 Licensing Terms of the Software Package Used................................... 23
2.5 Special Use Conditions for ETHERNET Devices .................................. 23
3 Device Description ..................................................................................24
3.1 View .....................................................................................................27
3.2 Labeling ................................................................................................29
3.2.1 Manufacturing Number..................................................................... 29
3.3 Connectors ...........................................................................................30
3.3.1 Data Contacts/Local Bus.................................................................. 30
3.3.2 Power Jumper Contacts/Field Supply .............................................. 31
3.3.3 CAGE CLAMP® Connectors ............................................................. 32
3.3.4 Service Interface ..............................................................................33
3.3.5 Network Connectors......................................................................... 34
3.3.6 Communication Interface ................................................................. 35
3.3.6.1 Operating as an RS-232 Interface ............................................... 36
3.3.6.2 Operating as an RS-485 Interface ............................................... 37
3.3.7 Antenna Connector .......................................................................... 38
3.4 Display Elements ..................................................................................39
3.4.1 Power Supply Indicating Elements ................................................... 39
3.4.2 Fieldbus/System Indicating Elements............................................... 40
3.4.3 Memory Card Indicating Elements ................................................... 41
3.4.4 Network Indicating Elements ............................................................ 42
3.4.5 Mobile Communications Network Status Indicating Elements .......... 43
3.5 Operating Elements .............................................................................. 44
3.5.1 Operating Mode Switch .................................................................... 44
3.5.1.1 CODESYS 2 Runtime System ..................................................... 44
3.5.1.2 e!RUNTIME Runtime System ...................................................... 44
3.5.2 Reset Button ....................................................................................45
3.6 Slot for Memory Card ........................................................................... 46
3.7 SIM Card Slot .......................................................................................47
3.8 Schematic Diagram ..............................................................................48
3.9 Technical Data .....................................................................................49
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
4 Table of Contents WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
3.9.1 Mechanical Data ..............................................................................49
3.9.2 System Data ....................................................................................49
3.9.3 Power Supply ...................................................................................49
3.9.4 Clock ................................................................................................50
3.9.5 Programming ...................................................................................50
3.9.6 Local Bus .........................................................................................50
3.9.7 ETHERNET .....................................................................................51
3.9.8 Communication Interface ................................................................. 51
3.9.9 Mobile Radio Modem ....................................................................... 51
3.9.10 Connection Type .............................................................................. 52
3.9.11 Climatic Environmental Conditions ................................................... 52
3.10 Approvals .............................................................................................53
3.11 Standards and Guidelines .................................................................... 54
4 Function Description ..............................................................................55
4.1 Network ................................................................................................55
4.1.1 Interface Configuration ..................................................................... 55
4.1.1.1 Operation in Switch Mode............................................................ 55
4.1.1.2 Operation with Separate Network Interfaces................................ 55
4.1.2 Network Security ..............................................................................56
4.1.2.1 Users and Passwords.................................................................. 56
4.1.2.1.1 Services and Users ................................................................. 56
4.1.2.1.2 WBM User Group.................................................................... 57
4.1.2.1.3 Linux® User Group .................................................................. 57
4.1.2.1.4 SNMP User Group .................................................................. 57
4.1.2.2 Web Protocols for WBM Access .................................................. 58
4.1.2.2.1 TLS Encryption ....................................................................... 58
4.1.3 Network Configuration...................................................................... 60
4.1.3.1 Host Name/Domain Name ........................................................... 60
4.1.4 Routing ............................................................................................60
4.1.5 Network Services .............................................................................64
4.1.5.1 DHCP Client ................................................................................64
4.1.5.2 DHCP Server...............................................................................64
4.1.5.3 DNS Server .................................................................................66
4.1.6 Cloud Connectivity Functionality ...................................................... 67
4.1.6.1 Components of the Cloud Connectivity Software Package .......... 67
4.2 Memory Card Function ......................................................................... 69
4.2.1 Formatting........................................................................................69
4.2.2 Data Backup ....................................................................................71
4.2.2.1 Backup Function.......................................................................... 71
4.2.2.2 Restore Function ......................................................................... 72
4.2.3 Inserting a Memory Card during Operation ...................................... 74
4.2.4 Removing the Memory Card during Operation ................................. 74
4.2.5 Setting the Home Directory for the Runtime System ........................ 75
4.2.6 Load Boot Project ............................................................................ 75
5 Mounting..................................................................................................77
5.1 Installation Position...............................................................................77
5.2 Overall Configuration ............................................................................ 77
5.3 Mounting onto Carrier Rail .................................................................... 79
5.3.1 Carrier Rail Properties...................................................................... 79
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Table of Contents 5
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
5.3.2 WAGO DIN Rails .............................................................................80
5.4 Spacing ................................................................................................80
5.5 Mounting Sequence..............................................................................81
5.6 Inserting Devices ..................................................................................82
5.6.1 Inserting the Controller ..................................................................... 82
6 Connect Devices .....................................................................................83
6.1 Connecting a Conductor to the CAGE CLAMP® ................................... 83
6.2 Power Supply Concept ......................................................................... 84
6.2.1 Overcurrent Protection ..................................................................... 84
6.2.2 Supplementary Power Supply Regulations ...................................... 85
7 Commissioning .......................................................................................86
7.1 Switching On the Controller .................................................................. 86
7.2 Determining the IP Address of the Host PC .......................................... 87
7.3 Setting an IP Address ........................................................................... 88
7.3.1 Assigning an IP Address using DHCP .............................................. 89
7.3.2 Changing an IP Address Using the “CBM” Configuration Tool via the
Serial Interface .................................................................................90
7.3.3 Changing an IP Address using “WAGO Ethernet Settings” .............. 93
7.3.4 Temporarily Setting a Fixed IP Address ........................................... 95
7.4 Testing the Network Connection ........................................................... 96
7.5 Changing Standard Passwords ............................................................ 97
7.6 Shutdown/Restart .................................................................................98
7.7 Initiating Reset Functions ..................................................................... 99
7.7.1 Warm Start Reset ............................................................................ 99
7.7.1.1 CODESYS 2 Runtime System ..................................................... 99
7.7.1.2 e!RUNTIME Runtime System ...................................................... 99
7.7.2 Cold Start Reset...............................................................................99
7.7.2.1 CODESYS 2 Runtime System ..................................................... 99
7.7.2.2 e!RUNTIME Runtime System ...................................................... 99
7.7.3 Software Reset .............................................................................. 100
7.8 Configuration ...................................................................................... 101
7.8.1 Configuration via Web-Based-Management (WBM) ....................... 102
7.8.1.1 WBM User Administration.......................................................... 103
7.8.1.2 General Information about the Page .......................................... 106
7.8.1.3 “Status Information” Page .......................................................... 109
7.8.1.3.1 “Controller Details” Group ..................................................... 109
7.8.1.3.2 “Network Details Xn” Group(s) .............................................. 109
7.8.1.4 “General PLC Runtime Configuration” Page .............................. 110
7.8.1.4.1 “General PLC Runtime Configuration” Group ........................ 110
7.8.1.5 “PLC Runtime Information” Page ............................................... 112
7.8.1.5.1 “PLC Runtime” Group ........................................................... 112
7.8.1.5.2 “Project Details” Group.......................................................... 112
7.8.1.5.3 “Task n” Group(s).................................................................. 113
7.8.1.6 “PLC WebVisu” Page ................................................................ 114
7.8.1.6.1 “Web Server Configuration” Group ........................................ 114
7.8.1.7 “Configuration of Host and Domain Name” Page ....................... 115
7.8.1.7.1 “HostName” Group................................................................ 115
7.8.1.7.2 “Domain Name” Group .......................................................... 115
7.8.1.8 “TCP/IP Configuration” Page ..................................................... 116
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
6 Table of Contents WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
7.8.1.8.1 “IP Configuration (Xn)” Group(s) ........................................... 116
7.8.1.8.2 “Default Gateway n” Groups ................................................. 117
7.8.1.8.3 “DNS Server” Group ............................................................. 118
7.8.1.9 “Ethernet Configuration” Page ................................................... 119
7.8.1.9.1 “Switch Configuration” Group ................................................ 119
7.8.1.9.2 “Interface Xn” Groups ........................................................... 119
7.8.1.10 “Routing” Page .......................................................................... 121
7.8.1.10.1 “General Routing Configuration” Group................................. 121
7.8.1.10.2 “Static Routes” Group ........................................................... 122
7.8.1.10.3 “Dynamic Routes” Group ...................................................... 123
7.8.1.10.4 “IP Masquerading” Group...................................................... 123
7.8.1.10.5 “Port Forwarding” Group ....................................................... 124
7.8.1.11 “General Firewall Configuration” Page ....................................... 125
7.8.1.11.1 “Global Firewall Parameters” Group ...................................... 125
7.8.1.11.2 “Firewall Parameters Interface xxx” Group ............................ 126
7.8.1.12 “Configuration of MAC Address Filter” Page .............................. 127
7.8.1.12.1 “Global MAC Address Filter State” Group ............................. 127
7.8.1.12.2 “MAC Address Filter State Xn” Group ................................... 128
7.8.1.12.3 “MAC Address Filter Whitelist” Group ................................... 128
7.8.1.13 “Configuration of User Filter” Page ............................................ 129
7.8.1.13.1 “User Filter” Group ................................................................ 129
7.8.1.13.2 “User Filter n” Group ............................................................. 129
7.8.1.13.3 “Add New User Filter” Group ................................................. 130
7.8.1.14 “Configuration of Time and Date” Page ..................................... 131
7.8.1.14.1 “Date on Device” Group ........................................................ 131
7.8.1.14.2 “Time on Device” Group ........................................................ 131
7.8.1.14.3 “Time Zone” Group ............................................................... 132
7.8.1.14.4 “TZ String” Group .................................................................. 133
7.8.1.15 “Configuration of the Users for the Web-based Management” Page134
7.8.1.15.1 “Change Password for Selected User” Group ....................... 134
7.8.1.16 “Create Bootable Image” Page .................................................. 135
7.8.1.16.1 "Create Bootable Image from Active Partition (<Active
Partition>" Group .................................................................. 135
7.8.1.17 “Configuration of Serial Interface RS232” Page ......................... 137
7.8.1.17.1 “Serial Interface Assigned to” Group ..................................... 137
7.8.1.17.2 “Assign Owner of Serial Interface (Active after Next Controller
Reboot)” Group ..................................................................... 137
7.8.1.18 “Configuration of Service Interface” Page .................................. 138
7.8.1.18.1 “Service Interface assigned to” Group ................................... 138
7.8.1.18.2 “Assign Owner of Service Interface (enabled after next
controller reboot)” Group ....................................................... 138
7.8.1.19 “Reboot Controller” Page ........................................................... 139
7.8.1.19.1 “Reboot Controller” Group..................................................... 139
7.8.1.20 “Firmware Backup” Page ........................................................... 140
7.8.1.21 “Firmware Restore” Page .......................................................... 142
7.8.1.22 “System Partition” Page............................................................. 144
7.8.1.22.1 “Current Active Partition” Group ............................................ 144
7.8.1.22.2 “Set Inactive Partition Active” Group ..................................... 144
7.8.1.23 “Mass Storage” Page................................................................. 145
7.8.1.23.1 “<Device Name>” Group(s) ................................................... 145
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Table of Contents 7
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
7.8.1.23.2 “<Device Name> - FAT Format” Group(s) ............................. 145
7.8.1.24 “Software Uploads” Page........................................................... 146
7.8.1.24.1 “Upload New Software” Group .............................................. 146
7.8.1.24.2 “Activate New Software” Group ............................................. 146
7.8.1.25 “Configuration of Network Services” Page ................................. 147
7.8.1.25.1 “Telnet” Group ...................................................................... 147
7.8.1.25.2 “FTP” Group.......................................................................... 147
7.8.1.25.3 “FTPS” Group ....................................................................... 147
7.8.1.25.4 “HTTP” Group ....................................................................... 148
7.8.1.25.5 “HTTPS” Group ..................................................................... 148
7.8.1.25.6 “WAGO-I/O-CHECK” Group .................................................. 148
7.8.1.25.7 “OPC UA” Group ................................................................... 149
7.8.1.26 “Configuration of NTP Client” Page ........................................... 150
7.8.1.26.1 “NTP Client Configuration” Group ......................................... 150
7.8.1.26.2 “NTP Single Request” Group ................................................ 150
7.8.1.27 “Configuration of PLC Runtime Services” Page ......................... 151
7.8.1.27.1 “General Configuration” Group .............................................. 151
7.8.1.27.2 “CODESYS 2” Group ............................................................ 151
7.8.1.27.3 “e!RUNTIME” Group ............................................................. 151
7.8.1.28 “SSH Server Settings” Page ...................................................... 153
7.8.1.28.1 “SSH Server” Group.............................................................. 153
7.8.1.29 “TFTP Server” Page .................................................................. 154
7.8.1.29.1 “TFTP Server” Group ............................................................ 154
7.8.1.30 “DHCP Configuration” Page ...................................................... 155
7.8.1.30.1 “DHCP Configuration Xn” Group ........................................... 155
7.8.1.31 “Configuration of DNS Service” Page ........................................ 156
7.8.1.31.1 “DNS Service” Group ............................................................ 156
7.8.1.32 “MODBUS Services Configuration” Page .................................. 157
7.8.1.32.1 “MODBUS TCP” Group ......................................................... 157
7.8.1.32.2 “MODBUS UDP” Group ........................................................ 157
7.8.1.33 “Configuration of Cloud Connectivity” Page ............................... 158
7.8.1.33.1 “Software Version” Group ..................................................... 158
7.8.1.33.2 “Status” Group ...................................................................... 158
7.8.1.33.3 “Settings” Group ................................................................... 159
7.8.1.34 “Configuration of General SNMP Parameters” Page.................. 162
7.8.1.34.1 “General SNMP Configuration” Group................................... 162
7.8.1.35 “Configuration of SNMP v1/v2c Parameters” Page .................... 163
7.8.1.35.1 “SNMP v1/v2c Manager Configuration” Group ...................... 163
7.8.1.35.2 “Actually Configured Trap Receivers” Group(s) ..................... 163
7.8.1.35.3 “Trap Receiver n” Group(s) ................................................... 164
7.8.1.35.4 “Add New Trap Receiver” Group ........................................... 164
7.8.1.36 “Configuration of SNMP v3 Users” Page ................................... 165
7.8.1.36.1 “Actually Configured v3 Users” Group(s) ............................... 165
7.8.1.36.2 “v3 User n” Group(s) ............................................................. 165
7.8.1.36.3 “Add New v3 User” Group ..................................................... 166
7.8.1.37 “Diagnostic Information” Page ................................................... 167
7.8.1.38 “Configuration of internal 3G Modem” Page .............................. 168
7.8.1.38.1 “SIM Authentication” Group ................................................... 168
7.8.1.38.2 “Mobile Network Configuration” Group .................................. 169
7.8.1.38.3 “Provider List” Group............................................................. 170
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
8 Table of Contents WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
7.8.1.38.4 “Network Package Service” Group ........................................ 170
7.8.1.38.5 “Upload and activate new Modem Software” Group .............. 171
7.8.1.39 “Configuration of OpenVPN and IPsec” Page ............................ 172
7.8.1.39.1 “OpenVPN” Group ................................................................ 172
7.8.1.39.2 “IPsec” Group ....................................................................... 172
7.8.1.39.3 “Certificate Upload” Group .................................................... 173
7.8.1.39.4 “Certificate List” Group .......................................................... 173
7.8.1.39.5 “Private Key List” Group ........................................................ 173
7.8.1.40 “Security Settings” Page ............................................................ 174
7.8.1.40.1 “TLS Configuration” Group .................................................... 174
7.8.1.41 “Open Source Licenses” Page ................................................... 175
7.8.1.42 “WAGO Licenses” Page ............................................................ 176
7.8.2 Configuration using a Terminal Program (CBM) ............................. 177
7.8.2.1 CBM Menu Structure Overview ................................................. 177
7.8.2.2 “Information” Menu .................................................................... 180
7.8.2.2.1 “Information” > “Controller Details” Submenu ........................ 180
7.8.2.2.2 “Information” > “Network Details” Submenu .......................... 181
7.8.2.3 “PLC Runtime” Menu ................................................................. 182
7.8.2.3.1 “PLC Runtime” > “Information” Submenu .............................. 182
7.8.2.3.2 “Information” > “Runtime Version” Submenu ......................... 183
7.8.2.3.3 “Information” > “Webserver Version” Submenu ..................... 183
7.8.2.3.4 “Information” > “State” Submenu ........................................... 183
7.8.2.3.5 “Information” > “Number of Tasks” Submenu ........................ 184
7.8.2.3.6 “Information” > “Project Details” Submenu ............................ 184
7.8.2.3.7 “Information” > “Tasks” Submenu.......................................... 184
7.8.2.3.8 “Tasks” > “Task n” Submenu................................................. 185
7.8.2.3.9 “PLC Runtime” > “General Configuration” Submenu ............. 185
7.8.2.3.10 “General Configuration” > “PLC Runtime Version” Submenu 186
7.8.2.3.11 “General Configuration” > “Home Dir On SD Card” Submenu186
7.8.2.3.12 “PLC Runtime” > “WebVisu” Submenu.................................. 187
7.8.2.4 “Networking” Menu .................................................................... 188
7.8.2.4.1 “Networking” > “Host/Domain Name” Submenu .................... 188
7.8.2.4.2 “Host/Domain Name” > “Hostname” Submenu ...................... 189
7.8.2.4.3 “Host/Domain Name” > “Domain Name” Submenu ............... 189
7.8.2.4.4 “Networking” > “TCP/IP” Submenu........................................ 189
7.8.2.4.5 “TCP/IP” > “IP Address” Submenu ........................................ 190
7.8.2.4.6 “IP Address” > “Xn“ Submenu ............................................... 190
7.8.2.4.7 “TCP/IP” > “Default Gateway” Submenu ............................... 191
7.8.2.4.8 “Default Gateway” > “Default Gateway n” Submenu.............. 191
7.8.2.4.9 “TCP/IP” > “DNS Server” Submenu ...................................... 192
7.8.2.4.10 “Networking” > “Ethernet” Submenu...................................... 192
7.8.2.4.11 “Ethernet” > “Switch Configuration” Submenu ....................... 193
7.8.2.4.12 “Ethernet” > “Ethernet Ports” Submenu ................................. 193
7.8.2.4.13 “Ethernet Ports” > “Interface Xn” Submenu ........................... 194
7.8.2.5 “Firewall” Menu .......................................................................... 195
7.8.2.5.1 “Firewall” > “General Configuration” Submenu ...................... 196
7.8.2.5.2 “General Configuration” > “Interface xxx” Submenu .............. 197
7.8.2.5.3 “Firewall” > “MAC Address Filter” Submenu .......................... 199
7.8.2.5.4 “MAC Address Filter” > “MAC address filter whitelist” Submenu200
7.8.2.5.5 “MAC address filter whitelist” > “Add new / No (n)” Submenu 200
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Table of Contents 9
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
7.8.2.5.6 “Firewall” > “User Filter” Submenu ........................................ 201
7.8.2.5.7 “User Filter” > “Add New / No (n)” Submenu ......................... 202
7.8.2.6 “Clock” Menu ............................................................................. 203
7.8.2.7 “Administration” Menu ............................................................... 204
7.8.2.7.1 “Administration” > “Create Image” Submenu ......................... 205
7.8.2.7.2 “Administration” > “Users” Submenu ..................................... 205
7.8.2.8 “Package Server” Menu ............................................................. 206
7.8.2.8.1 “Package Server” > “Firmware Backup” Submenu ................ 206
7.8.2.8.2 “Firmware Backup” > “Auto Update Feature” Submenu ........ 207
7.8.2.8.3 “Firmware Backup” > “Destination” Submenu........................ 207
7.8.2.8.4 “Package Server” > “Firmware Restore” Submenu ............... 208
7.8.2.8.5 “Firmware Restore” > “Select Package” Submenu ................ 208
7.8.2.8.6 “Package Server” > “System Partition” Submenu .................. 209
7.8.2.9 “Mass Storage” Menu ................................................................ 210
7.8.2.9.1 “Mass Storage” > “SD Card” Submenu ................................. 210
7.8.2.10 “Software Uploads” Menu .......................................................... 211
7.8.2.11 “Ports and Services” Menu ........................................................ 212
7.8.2.11.1 “Ports and Services” > “Telnet” Submenu ............................. 213
7.8.2.11.2 “Ports and Services” > “FTP” Submenu ................................ 213
7.8.2.11.3 “Ports and Services” > “FTPS” Submenu .............................. 214
7.8.2.11.4 “Ports and Services” > “HTTP” Submenu .............................. 214
7.8.2.11.5 “Ports and Services” > “HTTPS” Submenu ........................... 215
7.8.2.11.6 “Ports and Services” > “NTP” Submenu ................................ 215
7.8.2.11.7 “Ports and Services” > “SSH” Submenu ................................ 216
7.8.2.11.8 “Ports and Services” > “TFTP” Submenu .............................. 216
7.8.2.11.9 “Ports and Services” > “DHCPD” Submenu .......................... 217
7.8.2.11.10 “DHCPD” > “Xn” Submenu .................................................... 217
7.8.2.11.11 “Ports and Services” > “DNS” Submenu................................ 218
7.8.2.11.12 “Ports and Services” > “IOCHECK PORT” Submenu ............ 219
7.8.2.11.13 “Ports and Services” > “Modbus TCP” Submenu .................. 219
7.8.2.11.14 “Ports and Services” > “Modbus UDP” Submenu .................. 220
7.8.2.11.15 “Ports and Services” > “PLC Runtime Services” Submenu.... 220
7.8.2.11.16 “PLC Runtime Services” > “CODESYS 2” Submenu ............. 221
7.8.2.11.17 “PLC Runtime Services” > “e!RUNTIME” Submenu .............. 222
7.8.2.11.18 “…” > “Firewall Status” Submenu .......................................... 223
7.8.2.12 “SNMP” Menu............................................................................ 224
7.8.2.12.1 “SNMP” > “General SNMP Configuration” Submenu ............. 224
7.8.2.12.2 “SNMP” > “SNMP v1/v2c Manager Configuration” Submenu 225
7.8.2.12.3 “SNMP” > “SNMP v1/v2c Trap Receiver Configuration”
Submenu .............................................................................. 225
7.8.2.12.4 “SNMP” > “SNMP v3 Configuration” Submenu...................... 226
7.8.2.12.5 “SNMP” > “(Secure)SNMP firewalling” Submenu .................. 227
7.8.3 Configuration using “WAGO Ethernet Settings”.............................. 228
7.8.3.1 Identification Tab ....................................................................... 230
7.8.3.2 Network Tab .............................................................................. 231
7.8.3.3 PLC Tab .................................................................................... 233
7.8.3.4 Status Tab ................................................................................. 234
8 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3........................................................... 235
8.1 Installing the CODESYS 2.3 Programming System ............................ 235
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
10 Table of Contents WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
8.2 First Program with CODESYS 2.3 ...................................................... 235
8.2.1 Start the CODESYS Programming System .................................... 235
8.2.2 Creating a Project and Selecting the Target System ...................... 235
8.2.3 Creating the PLC Configuration ..................................................... 237
8.2.4 Editing the Program Function Block ............................................... 244
8.2.5 Loading and Running the PLC Program in the Fieldbus Controller
(ETHERNET) ................................................................................. 246
8.2.6 Creating a Boot Project .................................................................. 248
8.3 Syntax of Logical Addresses .............................................................. 248
8.4 Creating Tasks ................................................................................... 249
8.4.1 Cyclic Tasks ................................................................................... 252
8.4.2 Freewheeling Tasks ....................................................................... 253
8.4.3 Debugging an IEC Program ........................................................... 253
8.5 System Events ................................................................................... 257
8.5.1 Creating an Event Handler ............................................................. 260
8.6 Process Images .................................................................................. 262
8.6.1 Process Images for I/O Modules Connected to the Controller ........ 264
8.6.2 Process Image for Slaves Connected to the Fieldbus .................... 265
8.7 Access to Process Images of the Input and Output Data via CODESYS
2.3 ...................................................................................................... 265
8.8 Addressing Example ........................................................................... 267
8.9 Local Bus Synchronization ................................................................. 268
8.9.1 Case 1: CODESYS Task Interval Set Smaller than the Local Bus
Cycle .............................................................................................. 268
8.9.2 Case 2: CODESYS Task Interval Smaller than Twice the Local Bus
Cycle .............................................................................................. 270
8.9.3 Case 3: CODESYS Task Interval Greater than Twice the Local Bus
Cycle .............................................................................................. 271
8.9.4 Case 4: CODESYS Task Interval Greater than 10 ms.................... 272
8.9.5 Local Bus (KBus) Settings ............................................................. 273
8.9.5.1 Effect of Update Mode on CODESYS Tasks ............................. 274
8.9.5.1.1 Asynchronous Update Mode ................................................. 274
8.9.5.1.2 Synchronous Update Mode ................................................... 274
8.10 Memory Settings in CODESYS........................................................... 275
8.10.1 Program Memory ........................................................................... 275
8.10.2 Data Memory and Function Block Limitation .................................. 277
8.10.3 Remanent Memory ........................................................................ 278
8.11 General Target System Settings ......................................................... 279
8.12 CODESYS Visualization ..................................................................... 279
8.12.1 Limits of CODESYS Visualization .................................................. 282
8.12.2 Eliminating Errors in CODESYS Web Visualization ........................ 284
8.12.3 FAQs about CODESYS Web Visualization .................................... 285
9 e!RUNTIME Runtime Environment ....................................................... 287
9.1 General Notes .................................................................................... 287
9.2 CODESYS V3 Priorities ...................................................................... 288
9.3 Memory Spaces under e!RUNTIME.................................................... 289
9.3.1 Program and Data Memory ............................................................ 289
9.3.2 Function Block Limitation ............................................................... 289
9.3.3 Remanent Memory ........................................................................ 289
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Table of Contents 11
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
10 MODBUS – CODESYS 2 ........................................................................ 290
10.1 General .............................................................................................. 290
10.2 Features ............................................................................................. 290
10.3 Configuration ...................................................................................... 291
10.3.1 MODBUS Settings ......................................................................... 292
10.3.2 MODBUS TCP Settings ................................................................. 293
10.3.3 MODBUS UDP Settings ................................................................. 293
10.3.4 MODBUS RTU Settings ................................................................. 293
10.4 Data Exchange ................................................................................... 296
10.4.1 Process Image ............................................................................... 297
10.4.2 Flag Area ....................................................................................... 298
10.4.3 MODBUS Registers ....................................................................... 299
10.4.4 MODBUS Mapping ........................................................................ 299
10.4.4.1 MODBUS Mapping for Write Bit Services FC1, FC2 .................. 299
10.4.4.2 MODBUS Mapping for Write Bit Services FC5, FC15 ................ 300
10.4.4.3 MODBUS Mapping for Read Register Services FC3, FC4, FC23301
10.4.4.4 MODBUS Mapping for Write Register Services FC6, FC16, FC22,
FC23 ......................................................................................... 303
10.5 WAGO MODBUS Registers................................................................ 305
10.5.1 Process Image Properties .............................................................. 306
10.5.1.1 Register 0x1022 – Number of Registers in the MODBUS Input
Process Image .......................................................................... 306
10.5.1.2 Register 0x1023 – Number of Registers in the MODBUS Output
Process Image .......................................................................... 306
10.5.1.3 Register 0x1024 – Number of Bits in the MODBUS Input Process
Image ........................................................................................ 306
10.5.1.4 Register 0x1025 – Number of Bits in the MODBUS Output Process
Image ........................................................................................ 306
10.5.2 Network Configuration.................................................................... 307
10.5.2.1 Register 0x1028 – IP Configuration ........................................... 307
10.5.2.2 Register 0x102A – Number of Established TCP Connections .... 307
10.5.2.3 Register 0x1030 – MODBUS TCP Socket Timeout ................... 307
10.5.2.4 Register 0x1031 – MAC Address for ETHERNET-Interface 1 (eth0)307
10.5.2.5 Register 0x1037 - MODBUS TCP Response Delay ................... 307
10.5.3 PLC Status Register ...................................................................... 308
10.5.4 MODBUS Watchdog ...................................................................... 308
10.5.4.1 Register 0x1100 – Watchdog Command ................................... 310
10.5.4.2 Register 0x1101 – Watchdog Status ......................................... 312
10.5.4.3 Register 0x1102 – Watchdog Timeout ....................................... 312
10.5.4.4 Register 0x1103 – Watchdog Config ......................................... 312
10.5.5 Register 0x1104 – Watchdog Operation Mode ............................... 313
10.5.6 MODBUS Constants Registers ...................................................... 314
10.5.6.1 Electronic Nameplate ................................................................ 314
10.5.6.2 Register 0x2010 – Revision (Firmware Index) ........................... 314
10.5.6.3 Register 0x2011 – Series Designator ........................................ 314
10.5.6.4 Register 0x2012 – Device ID ..................................................... 314
10.5.6.5 Register 0x2013 – Major Firmware Version ............................... 315
10.5.6.6 Register 0x2014 – Minor Firmware Version ............................... 315
10.5.6.7 Register 0x2015 – MBS Version ................................................ 315
10.6 Diagnostics ......................................................................................... 316
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
12 Table of Contents WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
10.6.1 Diagnostics for the MODBUS Master ............................................. 316
10.6.2 Diagnostics for the Runtime System .............................................. 316
10.6.3 Diagnostics for the Error Server ..................................................... 316
11 MODBUS – e!RUNTIME ......................................................................... 319
11.1 MODBUS Address Overview .............................................................. 319
11.2 MODBUS Registers............................................................................ 320
11.2.1 MODBUS Watchdog ...................................................................... 322
11.2.1.1 Register 0xFA00 – Watchdog Command................................... 324
11.2.1.2 Register 0xFA01 – Watchdog Timeout ...................................... 325
11.2.1.3 Register 0xFA02 – Watchdog Status ......................................... 325
11.2.1.4 Register 0xFA03 – Watchdog Config ......................................... 326
11.2.1.5 MODBUS TCP Connection Watchdog Register......................... 327
11.2.2 Status Registers............................................................................. 328
11.2.2.1 PLC Status Register .................................................................. 328
11.2.3 Electronic Nameplate ..................................................................... 328
11.2.3.1 Order Number ........................................................................... 328
11.2.3.2 Firmware Version ...................................................................... 328
11.2.3.3 Hardware Version ...................................................................... 328
11.2.3.4 Firmware Loader/Boot Loader ................................................... 328
11.2.4 MODBUS Process Image Version.................................................. 328
11.2.5 MODBUS Process Image Registers............................................... 328
11.2.6 Constant Registers ........................................................................ 329
11.2.7 Live Register .................................................................................. 329
11.3 Estimating the MODBUS Master CPU Load ....................................... 330
12 Diagnostics............................................................................................ 331
12.1 Operating and Status Messages......................................................... 331
12.1.1 Power Supply Indicating Elements ................................................. 331
12.1.2 Mobile Communications Network Status LED ................................ 332
12.1.3 Fieldbus/System Indicating Elements............................................. 333
12.2 Diagnostics Messages via Flashing Sequences ................................. 340
12.2.1 Flashing Sequences ...................................................................... 340
12.2.2 Example of a Diagnostics Message Indicated by a Flashing
Sequence....................................................................................... 342
12.2.3 Meaning of Blink Codes and Procedures for Troubleshooting ........ 343
12.2.4 Meaning of Blink Codes and Procedures for Troubleshooting ........ 348
13 Service ................................................................................................... 349
13.1 Inserting and Removing the Memory Card.......................................... 349
13.1.1 Inserting the Memory Card ............................................................. 349
13.1.2 Removing the Memory Card .......................................................... 349
13.2 Inserting and Removing the SIM Card ................................................ 351
13.2.1 Inserting the SIM Card ................................................................... 351
13.2.2 Removing the SIM Card ................................................................. 351
13.3 Firmware Changes ............................................................................. 352
13.3.1 Perform Firmware Upgrade ............................................................ 352
13.3.2 Perform Firmware Downgrade ....................................................... 353
13.3.3 Factory Reset ................................................................................ 354
14 Removal ................................................................................................. 355
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Table of Contents 13
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
14.1 Removing Devices.............................................................................. 355
14.1.1 Removing the Controller ................................................................ 355
15 Appendix ............................................................................................... 356
15.1 Structure of Process Data for the I/O Modules .................................... 356
15.1.1 Digital Input Modules...................................................................... 357
15.1.1.1 1 Channel Digital Input Module with Diagnostics ....................... 357
15.1.1.2 2 Channel Digital Input Modules ................................................ 357
15.1.1.3 2 Channel Digital Input Module with Diagnostics ....................... 357
15.1.1.4 2 Channel Digital Input Module with Diagnostics and Output
Process Data ............................................................................. 358
15.1.1.5 4 Channel Digital Input Modules ................................................ 358
15.1.1.6 8 Channel Digital Input Modules ................................................ 358
15.1.1.7 8 Channel Digital Input Module PTC with Diagnostics and Output
Process Data ............................................................................. 359
15.1.1.8 16 Channel Digital Input Modules .............................................. 360
15.1.2 Digital Output Modules ................................................................... 361
15.1.2.1 1 Channel Digital Output Module with Input Process Data ......... 361
15.1.2.2 2 Channel Digital Output Modules ............................................. 361
15.1.2.3 2 Channel Digital Input Modules with Diagnostics and Input
Process Data ............................................................................. 362
15.1.2.4 4 Channel Digital Output Modules ............................................. 363
15.1.2.5 4 Channel Digital Output Modules with Diagnostics and Input
Process Data ............................................................................. 363
15.1.2.6 8 Channel Digital Output Module ............................................... 363
15.1.2.7 8 Channel Digital Output Modules with Diagnostics and Input
Process Data ............................................................................. 364
15.1.2.8 16 Channel Digital Output Modules ........................................... 364
15.1.2.9 8 Channel Digital Input/Output Modules .................................... 365
15.1.3 Analog Input Modules .................................................................... 366
15.1.3.1 1 Channel Analog Input Modules ............................................... 366
15.1.3.2 2 Channel Analog Input Modules ............................................... 366
15.1.3.3 4 Channel Analog Input Modules ............................................... 367
15.1.3.4 3-Phase Power Measurement Module ....................................... 368
15.1.3.5 8 Channel Analog Input Modules ............................................... 368
15.1.4 Analog Output Modules.................................................................. 369
15.1.4.1 2 Channel Analog Output Modules ............................................ 369
15.1.4.2 4 Channel Analog Output Modules ............................................ 369
15.1.5 Specialty Modules .......................................................................... 370
15.1.5.1 Counter Modules ....................................................................... 370
15.1.5.2 Pulse Width Modules ................................................................. 372
15.1.5.3 Serial Interface Modules with Alternative Data Format .............. 372
15.1.5.4 Serial Interface Modules with Standard Data Format ................. 373
15.1.5.5 Data Exchange Module ............................................................. 373
15.1.5.6 SSI Transmitter Interface Modules ............................................ 373
15.1.5.7 Incremental Encoder Interface Modules .................................... 374
15.1.5.8 DC-Drive Controller ................................................................... 376
15.1.5.9 Stepper Controller ..................................................................... 377
15.1.5.10 RTC Module .............................................................................. 378
15.1.5.11 DALI/DSI Master Module ........................................................... 378
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
14 Table of Contents WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
15.1.5.12 DALI Multi-Master Module ......................................................... 379
15.1.5.13 LON® FTT Module ..................................................................... 381
15.1.5.14 EnOcean Radio Receiver .......................................................... 381
15.1.5.15 MP Bus Master Module ............................................................. 381
15.1.5.16 Bluetooth® RF-Transceiver ........................................................ 382
15.1.5.17 Vibration Velocity/Bearing Condition Monitoring VIB I/O ............ 383
15.1.5.18 KNX/EIB/TP1 Module ................................................................ 383
15.1.5.19 AS-interface Master Module ...................................................... 384
15.1.6 System Modules ............................................................................ 386
15.1.6.1 System Modules with Diagnostics ............................................. 386
15.1.6.2 Binary Space Module ................................................................ 386
15.2 CODESYS 2 Libraries ........................................................................ 387
15.2.1 General Libraries ........................................................................... 387
15.2.1.1 CODESYS System Libraries ..................................................... 387
15.2.1.2 SysLibCom.lib ........................................................................... 388
15.2.1.3 SysLibFile.lib ............................................................................. 388
15.2.1.4 SysLibFileAsync.lib.................................................................... 389
15.2.1.5 SysLibRtc.lib.............................................................................. 390
15.2.1.6 BusDiag.lib ................................................................................ 391
15.2.1.7 mod_com.lib .............................................................................. 391
15.2.1.8 SerComm.lib.............................................................................. 391
15.2.1.9 WagoConfigToolLIB.lib .............................................................. 392
15.2.1.10 WagoLibCpuUsage.lib ............................................................... 408
15.2.1.11 WagoLibDiagnosticIDs.lib .......................................................... 408
15.2.1.12 WagoLibLed.lib.......................................................................... 409
15.2.1.13 WagoLibNetSnmp.lib ................................................................. 409
15.2.1.14 WagoLibNetSnmpManager.lib ................................................... 409
15.2.1.15 WagoLibSSL.lib ......................................................................... 410
15.2.1.16 WagoLibTerminalDiag.lib........................................................... 410
List of Figures ................................................................................................ 411
List of Tables .................................................................................................. 414
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Notes about this Documentation 15
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 1: Variants
Item Number/Variant Designation
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
750-8207/025-000 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G/T
1.2 Copyright
This Manual, including all figures and illustrations, is copyright-protected. Any
further use of this Manual by third parties that violate pertinent copyright
provisions is prohibited. Reproduction, translation, electronic and phototechnical
filing/archiving (e.g., photocopying) as well as any amendments require the
written consent of WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH & Co. KG, Minden, Germany.
Non-observance will involve the right to assert damage claims.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
16 Notes about this Documentation WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
1.3 Symbols
Personal Injury!
Indicates a high-risk, imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will
result in death or serious injury.
Personal Injury!
Indicates a moderate-risk, potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
could result in death or serious injury.
Personal Injury!
Indicates a low-risk, potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may
result in minor or moderate injury.
Damage to Property!
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in
damage to property.
Important Note!
Indicates a potential malfunction which, if not avoided, however, will not result in
damage to property.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Notes about this Documentation 17
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Additional Information:
Refers to additional information which is not an integral part of this
documentation (e.g., the Internet).
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
18 Notes about this Documentation WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Important Notes 19
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
2 Important Notes
This section includes an overall summary of the most important safety
requirements and notes that are mentioned in each individual section. To protect
your health and prevent damage to devices as well, it is imperative to read and
carefully follow the safety guidelines.
All changes to the coupler or controller should always be carried out by qualified
personnel with sufficient skills in PLC programming.
The devices have been developed for use in an environment that meets the IP20
protection class criteria. Protection against finger injury and solid impurities up to
12.5 mm diameter is assured; protection against water damage is not ensured.
Unless otherwise specified, operation of the devices in wet and dusty
environments is prohibited.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
20 Important Notes WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
prototype test certificate must be obtained that confirms the correct installation of
the system in a housing or switch cabinet.
• Repairs,
• Changes to the hardware or software that are not described in the
operating instructions,
• Improper use of the components.
Further details are given in the contractual agreements. Please send your
request for modified and new hardware or software configurations directly to
WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH & Co. KG.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Important Notes 21
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
22 Important Notes WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
2.3 Disclaimer
The “PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G” controller (750-8207) also communicates via the
mobile communications network. Please note that the mobile communications
services used by the controller may be affected by faults in the service provider’s
network. Such faults are beyond the control of WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH &
Co. KG.
WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH & Co. KG therefore rejects any guarantee for the
execution of the commands transmitted by/to the controller.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Important Notes 23
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The licence conditions of the software packages are stored in the controller in
text form. They can be accessed via the WBM page “Legal Information” > “Open
Source Software.”
You can obtain the source code with licensing terms of the open-source software
from WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH & Co. KG on request. Send your request to
[email protected] with the subject “Controller Board Support Package.”
• Change the default passwords before first use! This will reduce the risk of
unauthorized access to your system.
• Regularly change the passwords used! This will reduce the risk of
unauthorized access to your system.
• Regularly perform threat analyses. You can check whether the measures
taken meet your security requirements.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
24 Device Description WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
3 Device Description
The controller 750-8207(PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G) is an automation device that
can perform control tasks of a PLC. It is suitable for mounting on a DIN rail and
stands out on account of its various interfaces.
You can connect all available I/O modules of the WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 (750
and 753 Series) to the controller, enabling it to internally process analog and
digital signals from the automation environment, or to supply these signals to
other devices via one of the available interfaces.
• In line topology with a common MAC address and IP address for both
interfaces.
• 10BASE-T / 100BASE-TX
• Full/Half duplex
• Autonegotiation
The following fieldbus circuits are implemented for exchange of process data:
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Device Description 25
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
• MODBUS UDP Master/Slave
In the controller, all input signals from the sensors are combined. After
connecting the controller, all of the I/O modules on the bus node are detected
and a local process image is created from these. Analog and specialty module
data is sent via words and/or bytes; digital data is sent bit by bit.
No direct access from fieldbus to the process image for I/O modules!
Any data that is required from the I/O module process image must be explicitly
mapped in the CODESYS program to the data in the fieldbus process image and
vice versa! Direct access is not possible!
In the controller's initial state, the installed firmware is based on Linux®, with
special real-time extensions of the RT-Preempt patch. In addition, the following
application programs are also installed on the controller, along with a number of
different auxiliary programs:
• a SNMP server/client
• a Telnet server
• a SSH server/client
• a Web server
• a NTP client
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
26 Device Description WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Device Description 27
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
3.1 View
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
28 Device Description WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Device Description 29
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
3.2 Labeling
The front labeling includes:
- Device designation
- Name of the display elements, connections and control elements
- Serial number with hardware and firmware version
There are two serial numbers in two rows in the side marking. They are left of the
release tab. The first 10 positions in the longer row of the serial numbers contain
version and date identifications.
01 14 01 01 01 (additional positions)
WW YY FW -- HW FL -
Calendar Year Firmware Hardware Firmware Internal information
week version version loader
version
The row order can vary depending on the production year, only the longer row is
relevant. The back part of this and the shorter row contain internal administration
information from the manufacturer.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
30 Device Description WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
3.3 Connectors
Communication between the controller and the I/O modules and system power
supply for the I/O modules is provided via the local bus, which consists of 6 data
contacts designed as self-cleaning gold spring contacts.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Device Description 31
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
32 Device Description WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
®
Figure 5: CAGE CLAMP connections
®
Table 6: Legend for figure “CAGE CLAMP connections”
Contact Description Description
1 24 V System power supply voltage +24 V
2 + Field-side power supply voltage UV
3 - Field-side power supply voltage 0 V
4 Ground Field-side power supply voltage, ground
5 0V System power supply voltage 0 V
6 + Field-side power supply voltage UV
7 - Field-side power supply voltage 0 V
8 Ground Field-side power supply voltage, ground
</dg_
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Device Description 33
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The connection to the 4-pin header under the cover flap can be realized via the
communication cables with the item numbers750-920 and 750-923 or via the
WAGO radio adapter with the item number 750-921.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
34 Device Description WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Device Description 35
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
36 Device Description WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Depending on the device type DTE (e.g., PC) or DCE (e.g., PFC, modem), the
RS-232 signals have different data directions.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Device Description 37
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
To minimize reflection at the end of the line, the RS-485 line must be terminated
at both ends by a cable termination. If required, one pull-up or pull-down resistor
may be used. These resistors ensure a defined level on the bus when no
subscriber is active, i.e., when all subscribers are in “Tri-state”.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
38 Device Description WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Device Description 39
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
40 Device Description WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Device Description 41
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 13: Legend for Figure “Indicating Elements, Memory Card Slot”
Description Color Description
SD Yellow/Off Memory card status
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
42 Device Description WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Device Description 43
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 15: Legend for the “Mobile Radio Network Status Indicators” Figure
Description Color Description
CON Green/off Mobile radio network status
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
44 Device Description WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The function of the mode selector switch depends on the activated runtime
system (CODESYS 2 or e!RUNTIME).
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Device Description 45
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
You can initiate different functions using the Reset button depending on the
position of the mode selector:
Please refer to the same sections in the back of this manual for information about
the functions.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
46 Device Description WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The slot for the SD memory card is located on the front of the housing. The
memory card is locked in the enclosure by a push/push mechanism. Inserting
and removing the memory card is described in the Section “Service” > “Inserting
and Removing the Memory Card.”
The memory card is protected by a cover flap. The cover cap is sealable.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Device Description 47
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The SIM card slot is located on the front of the housing. The SIM card is locked in
the housing with a SIM card holder.
Inserting and removing the SIM card is described in the section “Service” >
“Inserting and Removing the SIM Card”!
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
48 Device Description WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Device Description 49
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
50 Device Description WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
3.9.4 Clock
</dg_
3.9.5 Programming
Table 23: Technical Data – Programming
Programming CODESYS 2 WAGO-I/O-PRO V2.3
e!RUNTIME e!COCKPIT
IEC 61131-3 LD, FBD, ST, FC
CODESYS 2 memory configuration
Program memory (Flash) 16 MByte
Data memory (RAM) 64 MByte
Non-volatile memory (NVRAM, 128 kByte
Retain + Flags)
e!RUNTIME memory configuration
Program and data memory 60 MByte (dynamically distributed)
Non-volatile memory (NVRAM, 128 kByte
Retain + Flags)
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Device Description 51
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
3.9.7 ETHERNET
Table 25: Technical Data – ETHERNET
ETHERNET 2 x RJ-45 (switched or separated mode)
Transmission medium Twisted Pair S-UTP, 100 Ω, Cat 5,
100 m maximum cable length
Baud rate 10/100 Mbit/s; 10Base-T/100Base-TX
Protocols DHCP, DNS, SNTP, FTP, FTPS (only
explicit connections), SNMP, HTTP,
HTTPS, SSH, MODBUS (TCP, UDP)
MODBUS input and CODESYS 2 1,000 words,
output process image, also with MODBUS access to the flag
max. area (see Section "MODBUS" > … >
"Flag Area")
e!RUNTIME 32,000 words
No direct access from fieldbus to the process image for I/O modules!
Any data that is required from the I/O module process image must be explicitly
mapped in the CODESYS program to the data in the fieldbus process image and
vice versa! Direct access is not possible!
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
52 Device Description WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Device Description 53
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
3.10 Approvals
The following approvals have been granted to the “PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G”
controller (750-8207):
Conformity Marking
HF Exposition
This equipment complies with FCC and ISED radiation exposure
limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment
should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm
between the radiator and your body.
Cet équipement est conforme aux exigences des commissions FCC
et ISED relatives aux limitations de l'exposition à l'irradiation pour un
environnement non contrôlé. Cet équipement doit être installé et
utilisé en respectant une distance minimale de 20 cm entre le
radiateur et le corps humain.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
54 Device Description WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Function Description 55
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
4 Function Description
</dg_
4.1 Network
For interface X1, a fixed IP address can be set temporarily (“Fix IP Address”).
The setting is carried out with the Reset button (see Section “Commissioning” >
… > “Temporarily Setting a Fixed IP Address”).
For operation in Switch mode, the TCP/IP settings such as the IP address or
subnet mask apply to both X1 and X2.
When switching to Switch mode, the X1 settings are applied as a new common
configuration for X1 and X2.
The device is then no longer accessible via the IP address previously set for X2.
This must be taken into account for CODESYS applications that use X2 for
communication.
When operating with separate interfaces and fixed IP address, the device can still
be accessed via the interface X2 via the regular IP address.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
56 Function Description WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Several groups of users are provided in the controller which can be used for
various services.
Default passwords are set for all users. We strongly recommend changing these
passwords on startup!
Change passwords
Default passwords are documented in these instructions and therefore do not
offer adequate protection! Change the passwords to meet your particular needs.
All password-protected services and their associated users are listed in the
following table.
Users
WBM Linux®
SNMP
admin
admin
Service
user
user
root
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Function Description 57
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
WBM has its own user administration system. The users in this system are
isolated from the other user groups in the system for security reasons.
Change passwords
Default passwords are documented in these instructions and therefore do not
offer adequate protection! Change the passwords to meet your particular needs.
The Linux® users group include the actual users of the operating system, which is
likewise used by most services.
The passwords for these users must be configured through a terminal connection
via SSH/RS-232.
®
Table 33: Linux Users
User Special Feature Home Directory Default Password
root Super user /root wago
admin CODESYS user /home/admin wago
user Normal user /home/user user
Change passwords
Default passwords are documented in these instructions and therefore do not
offer adequate protection! Change the passwords to meet your particular needs.
The SNMP service manages its own users. In its initial state, no users are stored
in the system.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
58 Function Description WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The HTTP and HTTPS web protocols can be used to access the WBM pages for
the controller. HTTPS is preferred because it uses the SSL/TLS protocol. The
SSL/TLS protocol ensures secure communication through encryption and
authentication
The default setting for the controller allows strong encryption, but uses only
simple authentication methods. As authentication for any secure communication
channel plays a central role, it is strongly recommended that you use secure
authentication. The security certificate saved on the controller is the basis for
authentication. The default location for the security certificate is:
/etc/lighttpd/https-cert.pem
The “TLS Configuration” group of the WBM page “Security” can be used to switch
the cryptographic methods allowed for HTTPS and the TLS versions that can be
used.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Function Description 59
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
60 Function Description WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
</dg_
The default host name or the configured name is active again if the network
interfaces are set to static IP addresses or if a host name is not received via the
DHCP response.
A similar mechanism is used for a domain name as for the host name. The
difference is that a default domain name is not set. As long as a domain name is
not configured or supplied by DHCP, the domain name is empty.
4.1.4 Routing
As part of the TCP/IP configuration, the controller allows you to configure static
routes, IP masquerading and port forwarding. Default gateways are configured
via static routes, since default gateways are a special case of static routes.
A network station transmits to a gateway all network data packets for systems
outside of its local network. This gateway is responsible for the appropriate
routing of the data packets so that they reach the target system. To allow access
to different target systems, it may be necessary to configure multiple gateways.
This is configured by adding routing entries. A routing entry consists of the
following information:
1. Destination address,
2. Destination mask,
3. Gateway address,
4. Gateway metric.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Function Description 61
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
no specific routing entry exists for their destination address and destination mask
are sent to this default gateway.
1. Default Gateway
If the value “default” is entered in the “Destination Address” field, a default
gateway, also called a default route, is defined. The value “0.0.0.0” must
then be set in the “Destination Mask” field.
2. Route
If an IP address or IP address range is entered in the “Destination Address”
field, then all network data packets that are directed to the network address
or network address range are sent to the gateway address corresponding
to the entry.
If the IP address of the gateway is outside the IP address space that the
controller can reach, the associated route is not enabled.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
62 Function Description WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The metric value of the configured routing entries can be specified for the
controller. The default value for the metric is 20. Besides the manually
configurable routes, default gateways can also be set via DHCP replies. All
default gateways transferred via DHCP are assigned a permanent metric value of
10.
Metric example:
A controller obtains its IP configuration via a DHCP server and receives both the
IP address and the network mask 192.168.1.10/24. Furthermore, a gateway with
IP address 192.168.1.2 and metric value 20 is set up on the controller. Therefore,
when no specific routing entry exists for the target address of network data
packets, the controller sends them to gateway 192.168.1.2. Besides the IP
address and network mask, the DHCP server is now instructed to allocate a
default gateway of 192.168.1.1. The controller gives this default gateway a metric
value of 10. Therefore, the default gateway received via DHCP is preferred over
the manually configured gateway.
The routing entries are used to specify which gateways the network data packets
are sent. If the controller is running in switched mode and only has one network
interface, all network traffic passes through this network interface. If the controller
is running in separated mode or contains a modem, it has more than one network
interface. Therefore, it is possible for a network data packet to arrive at the
controller on one network interface and depart on a different network interface.
This forwarding between different network interfaces must be explicitly enabled; it
is disabled when the controller is delivered. To enable the forwarding, “Routing
enabled entirely” must be enabled in the “General Routing Configuration” group.
In this case, the controller can function as a router.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Function Description 63
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Network route example:
A network route is a route to a subnet, which can contain multiple hosts. In the
following example, a route to a subnet should be specified with network address
192.168.1.0. The route passes through a gateway that can be reached via
address 10.0.1.3. To configure a network route to the destination network on a
controller connected to the gateway, the following settings must be made:
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
64 Function Description WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The controller can get network parameters from an external DHCP master via the
DHCP Client service.
- IP address
- SubNet mask
- Router/gateway
- Hostname
- Domain
- DNS server
- NTP server
For the IP address, SubNet mask and router/gateway parameters, the entries are
stored per ETHERNET port (X1, X2).
The Hostname and Domain parameters are stored according to the LIFO
principle (Last In First Out). The settings from the last DHCP offer received are
always used.
The DNS and NTP Server parameters are stored centrally for global use. All
transmitted parameters are saved.
The controller provides the DHCP server service for the automatic configuration
of IP addresses of network stations on the same subnet.
Generally, only one DHCP server can be active on a subnet at one time.
In “switched” mode, these settings are possible for both interfaces together and
in “separated” mode for each interface separately.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Function Description 65
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The settings are made, for example, in the WBM via the “DHCP Configuration”
page.
The DHCP server also passes other parameters in addition to the IP address.
The following table shows the complete list.
Not all parameters can be set in the WBM. If you want to set other values for the
existing parameters or want to pass other parameters via DHCP, the DHCP
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
66 Function Description WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
server must be manually configured. For the controller, the DHCP server service
is handled by the program "dnsmasq".
From a Linux® command line, an editor must be used to change the file
“/etc/dnsmasq.d/dnsmasq_default.conf” to set the configuration.
The controller offers the DNS server service for the automatic assignment of
hostnames to IP addresses of network stations.
The DNS server takes over the names and IP addresses of local network stations
from the DHCP server. This DNS server routes requests for non-local names,
such as from the Internet, to higher-level DNS servers if configured and
accessible.
The settings are made, e.g., in the WBM, via the “Configuration of DNS Service”
page.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Function Description 67
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
You can specify the cloud service to use: Microsoft Azure, Amazon Web Services
and IBM Bluemix are available.
Data is transmitted from the controller to the cloud service as JSON files. The
connection can be encrypted with TLS; see the section “Functional Description” >
… > “TLS Encryption.”
You can find the settings that must be configured in the controller in order to use
the cloud connectivity functionality in the section “Start-Up” > … > “Configuration
Using Web-Based Management.”
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
68 Function Description WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Function Description 69
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The function of the memory card in normal operation and possible faults that may
occur when the memory card is used are described in the following sections for
different operating modes.
4.2.1 Formatting
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
70 Function Description WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Memory card access from CODESYS only possible with FAT16, FAT32 or
NTFS!
If the CODESYS user “admin” (see the section “Network” > “Network Security” >
“Users and Passwords” > “Services and Users“) is supposed to be able to access
files created on the memory card, the memory card must be formatted with
FAT16, FAT32 or NTFS.
If the Linux® file system formats EXT2 or EXT3 are used, “root” rights are
required for data access. Therefore, access via CODESYS is not possible.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Function Description 71
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The necessary settings can be made and the functions can be executed via the
WBM pages or via the CBM “Backup” and “Restore” menus.
The storage medium (internal memory or SD card) and, if applicable, the storage
location on the network can be set.
The backup function enables the data of the internal memory and device settings
to be saved on the memory card during operation.
The backup function can be called via the WBM page “Firmware Backup” or the
CBM menu “Firmware Backup.”
The network or the inserted memory card can be selected as the target medium.
The files of the internal drive are stored on the target medium in the directory
media/sd/copy and in the corresponding subdirectories.
The information that is not present as files on the controller is stored in XML
format in the directory media/sd/settings/.
If the memory card is selected as the target medium, the LED above the memory
card slot flashes yellow/orange during the save operation.
The device settings and files of the internal drive are then saved on the target
medium.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
72 Function Description WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The controller has an automatic update function. If this function is activated on a
memory card before the data backup and a controller is booted from this memory
card, this data is restored automatically on the internal memory of the controller.
The restore function is used to load the data and device settings from the
memory card to the internal memory during operation.
The restore function can be called via the WBM page “Firmware Restore” or the
CBM menu “Firmware Restore.”
The network or, if it is inserted, the memory card can be selected as the source
medium.
If the memory card is selected as the source medium, the LED above the
memory card slot flashes yellow/orange during the load operation.
When loading the data, the files are copied from the directory media/sd/copy/ of
the source medium to the appropriate directories on the internal memory.
The device has an active and an inactive root partition. The system backup is
stored on the inactive partition. Startup is then performed from the newly written
partition. If the startup process can be completed, the new partition is switched to
active. Otherwise, booting is performed again from the old active partition during
the next boot process.
The boot project is loaded automatically and the settings automatically activated
after a restart. The “Boot project location” setting on the “General PLC Runtime
Configuration Web” page of the WBM determines whether the boot project of the
internal drive or the memory card is loaded.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Function Description 73
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
File size must not exceed the size of the internal drive!
Note that the amount of data in the media/sd/copy/ directory must not exceed the
total size of the internal drive.
Reset by restore
A reset is performed when the system or settings are restored by CODESYS!
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
74 Function Description WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
During normal operation, the memory card is incorporated into the file system of
the controller as a drive.
No automatic copy procedures are triggered.
The LED above the memory card flashes yellow/orange during the access.
The memory card is then ready for operation and available under /media/sd.
The LED above the memory card flashes yellow/orange during the attempted
access.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Function Description 75
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
You can use the WBM to move the home directory for the runtime system to the
memory card, e.g., to make more memory available for a large boot project or
other files.
• When moving the home directory to the memory card, insert a memory
card formatted to support file system. Only the first partition of a memory
card can be accessed at /media/sd and can be used as the home directory.
Only when the two conditions are met can the “Home directory on memory card
enabled” checkbox be selected from the WBM on the “PLC Runtime” page.
Press the [Submit] button to apply the settings, which take effect after the next
restart.
No files are applied from the old to the new home directory.
After moving the directory, a project must be loaded and a boot project created.
It should be noted that the memory card may not be removed under any
circumstances as long as the home directory is there. If an application is running,
system safety can be endangered by an uncontrolled controller crash.
Switching the home directory has no effect if the controller was botted from a
memory card. The configuration state is saved, but only takes effect if the content
of the memory card is copied to the internal memory.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
76 Function Description WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 36: Loading a Boot Project
“Home
Boot Project Memory Card
Directory on
Stored in with Boot Boot Project is
Memory Card
Internal Flash Project Loaded ...
Enabled”
Memory Inserted
Checked
No No, no boot project exists
No
Yes No, no boot project exists
No No, no boot project exists in the
No
Yes internal flash memory
Yes Yes, from memory card
No Yes, from internal flash memory
No, invalid combination, since
no no boot project is allowed to
(Yes) invalid
exist in the internal flash
memory for this setting
Yes
No Yes, from internal flash memory
No, invalid combination, since
Yes no boot project is allowed to
(Yes) invalid
exist in the internal flash
memory for this setting
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Mounting 77
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
5 Mounting
5.1 Installation Position
Along with horizontal and vertical installation, all other installation positions are
allowed.
Examples:
Exception:
The number of connected I/O modules also depends on the type of fieldbus
coupler/controller is used. For example, the maximum number of stackable I/O
modules on one PROFIBUS DP/V1 fieldbus coupler/controller is 63 with no
passive I/O modules and end module.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
78 Mounting WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Increase the total length using a coupler module for internal data bus
extension!
You can increase the total length of a fieldbus node by using a 750-628 I/O
Module (coupler module for internal data bus extension). For such a
configuration, attach a 750-627 I/O Module (end module for internal data bus
extension) after the last I/O module of a module assembly. Use an RJ-45 patch
cable to connect the I/O module to the coupler module for internal data bus
extension of another module block.
This allows you to segment a fieldbus node into a maximum of 11 blocks with
maximum of 10 I/O modules for internal data bus extension.
The maximum cable length between two blocks is five meters.
More information is available in the manuals for the 750-627 and 750-628 I/O
Modules.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Mounting 79
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Carrier rails have different mechanical and electrical properties. For the optimal
system setup on a carrier rail, certain guidelines must be observed:
• The carrier rail must optimally support the EMC measures integrated into
the system and the shielding of the I/O module connections.
• The geometry of the carrier rail must not be altered in order to secure the
safe hold of the components. In particular, when shortening or mounting the
carrier rail, it must not be crushed or bent.
• The base of the I/O components extends into the profile of the carrier rail.
For carrier rails with a height of 7.5 mm, mounting points are to be riveted
under the node in the carrier rail (slotted head captive screws or blind
rivets).
• The metal springs on the bottom of the housing must have low-impedance
contact with the DIN rail (wide contact surface is possible).
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
80 Mounting WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Observe the mounting distance of the DIN rail when the load is increased!
With increased vibration and shock load, mount the DIN rail at a mounting
distance of max. 60 mm.
5.4 Spacing
The spacing between adjacent components, cable conduits, casing and frame
sides must be maintained for the complete fieldbus node.
The spacing creates room for heat transfer, installation or wiring. The spacing to
cable conduits also prevents conducted electromagnetic interferences from
influencing the operation.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Mounting 81
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The reliable positioning and connection is made using a tongue and groove
system. Due to the automatic locking, the individual devices are securely seated
on the rail after installation.
Starting with the fieldbus coupler/controller, the I/O modules are mounted
adjacent to each other according to the project design. Errors in the design of the
node in terms of the potential groups (connection via the power contacts) are
recognized, as the I/O modules with power contacts (blade contacts) cannot be
linked to I/O modules with fewer power contacts.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
82 Mounting WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
3. Use a screwdriver blade to turn the locking disc until the nose of the locking
disc engages behind the carrier rail (see the following figure). This prevents
the controller from canting on the carrier rail.
With the controller snapped in place, the electrical connections for the data
contacts and power contacts (if any) to the possible subsequent I/O module are
established.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Connect Devices 83
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
6 Connect Devices
6.1 Connecting a Conductor to the CAGE CLAMP®
The WAGO CAGE CLAMP® connection is appropriate for solid, stranded and
finely stranded conductors.
If more than one conductor must be routed to one connection, these must be
connected in an up-circuit wiring assembly, for example using WAGO feed-
through terminals.
1. To open the CAGE CLAMP® insert the actuating tool into the opening
above the connection.
3. To close the CAGE CLAMP® simply remove the tool - the conductor is then
clamped firmly in place.
®
Figure 26: Connecting a Conductor to a CAGE CLAMP
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
84 Connect Devices WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The system and field voltage of the WAGO-I/O-SYSTEMs 750 is supplied on the
head stations and bus supply modules.
For components that work with extra low voltage, only SELV/PELV voltage
sources should be used.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Connect Devices 85
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Filter modules for 24 V supply are required for the certified operation of the
system.
Therefore, the following power supply concept must be absolutely complied with.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
86 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
7 Commissioning
7.1 Switching On the Controller
Before switching on the controller ensure that you
• have connected all required data cables (see section “Connections”) to the
corresponding interfaces and have secured the connectors by their
attached locking screws,
To switch on both the controller and the connected I/O modules, switch on your
power supply unit.
Starting of the controller is indicated by a brief green flashing of all LEDs. After a
few seconds the SYS LED will signal successful boot-up of the controller.
The CODESYS 2.3 runtime system or e!RUNTIME is started at the same time.
Once the entire system has been successfully started, the SYS and I/O LEDs
light up green.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 87
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
2. In the MS DOS prompt enter the command “ipconfig” and then press
[Enter].
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
88 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Adapt IP addressing for your specific system structure to ensure that the PC and
the controller can communicate with one another using one of the available
configuration tools (WBM, “WAGO Ethernet Settings”, CBM) (see section
“Configuration”).
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 89
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
In the example figure shown here, the corresponding output of “Open DHCP” is
presented.
In conjunction with the DNS server associated with DHCP, the device can be
reached using its host name.
This name consists of the prefix “PFCx00-“ and the last six places of the MAC
address (in the example shown here: “00:30:DE:FF:00:5A”). The MAC address of
the device can be printed on the label on the side of the device.
The host name of the device in the example shown here is thus “PFC200-
FF005A”.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
90 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 91
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
4. In the Main menu use the keyboard (arrow keys or numeric keypad) to
move to and select Networking and then press [Enter].
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
92 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
7. In the menu TCP/IP Configuration select IP Address and press [Enter].
8. In the menu Change IP Address enter the new IP address and confirm by
clicking [OK]. If you want to return to the main menu without making
changes, click [Abort].
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 93
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
You can use WAGO communication cables or WAGO radio adapters or even the
IP network for data communication.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
94 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
6. Select the “Network” tab:
8. In the column “Input” enter the required IP address and, if applicable, the
address of the subnet mask and of the gateway.
10. You can now close “WAGO Ethernet Settings”, or make other changes
directly in the Web-based Management system as required. To do this,
click on [Run WBM] at the right in the window.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 95
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
</dg_
To make this setting, set the mode selector switch to STOP and press and hold
the Reset button (RST) for longer than 8 seconds.
Execution of the setting is signaled by the “SYS” LED flashing orange.
To cancel this setting, perform a software reset or switch off the controller and
then switch it back on.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
96 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
2. In the MS DOS window, enter the command “ping” and the IP address of
the controller (for example, ping 192.168.1.17)and then press [Enter].
3. Your PC sends out a query that is answered by the controller. This reply
appears in the MS DOS prompt window. If the error message “Timeout”
appears, the controller has not responded properly. You then need to check
your network settings.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 97
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Change passwords
The standard passwords are documented in these instructions and therefore do
not offer adequate protection! Change the passwords to meet your particular
needs!
1. Connect the controller to a PC via one of the network interfaces (X1, X2).
2. Start a web browser program on the PC and call up the WBM of the
controller.
4. Change the password for all users on the WBM “Configuration of the users
for the WBM” page.
5. Select each user and enter a new password and confirm it.
The table in the Section “Functional Description” > ... > “Users and Passwords” >
“Linux® Users Group” shows the standard passwords for the Linux® users.
Proceed as follows to change these passwords:
4. Change the password for all users with the “passwd root,” “passwd admin”
and “passwd user” commands.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
98 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
</dg_
7.6 Shutdown/Restart
Switch off the power supply to shut down the controller.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 99
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
</dg_
To perform a warm start reset, set the mode selector switch to "Reset" and hold it
there for two to seven seconds.
Execution of the reset is signaled by the red “RUN LED” briefly going out when
the mode selector switch is released.
All e!RUNTIME applications are reset with a warm start reset. All global data is
set to its initialization values. This corresponds to the e!COCKPIT IDE “Reset
warm” command.
</dg_
To perform a warm start reset, set the mode selector switch to "Reset" and hold it
there for two to seven seconds.
Execution of the reset is signaled by the red “RUN LED” briefly going out when
the mode selector switch is released.
On a cold start reset the CODESYS 2 application is reset and the memory
containing the retain variables is cleared.
This corresponds to the WAGO I/O PRO IDE “Reset (Cold)” command.
</dg_
To perform a cold start reset, set the mode selector switch to “Reset” and hold it
there for more than seven seconds.
Execution of the reset is signaled after seven seconds by the “RUN” LED going
out for an extended period. You can then release the mode selector switch.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
100 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
All e!RUNTIME applications are reset with a cold start reset. All global data and
the retain variables are set to their initialization values.
This corresponds to the e!COCKPIT IDE “Reset Cold” command.
</dg_
To perform a cold start reset, set the mode selector switch to “Reset” and hold it
there for more than seven seconds.
Execution of the reset is signaled after seven seconds by the “RUN” LED going
out for an extended period. You can then release the mode selector switch.
</dg_
To perform a software reset, set the mode selector switch to RUN or STOP and
then press the Reset button (RST) for one to eight seconds.
All LEDs will light up briefly in green to signal reset completion.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 101
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
7.8 Configuration
The following methods are available for configuring the controller:
• Access via the CODESYS PLC program using the CODESYS 2 library
WagoConfigToolLIB.lib (section “Appendix” > “WagoConfigToolLIB.lib”) or
the e!RUNTIME library “WagoAppConfigTool.lib”
The CBM is basically for the initial configuration and startup of the controller.
Therefore, it only provides a subset of the WBM parameters. For example,
parameters that cannot be displayed in a terminal window in a reasonable way
and are not necessary for initial startup are not displayed. You can find the
explanations of the parameters starting with the section “‘Information’ Page.”
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
102 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
If you have installed a DHCP server on your PC and would like to access WBM
through DHCP, use the other interface. You can find detailed information about
this in the section “Assigning an IP Address Using DHCP.”
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 103
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Some pages of the WBM are accessible only for certain users. They are only
displayed if you have logged into the WBM. You can access the login form via
the “Login” link. Pages which cannot be accessed with your current user name
are already grayed out in the navigation. You can nevertheless select the entries
in the navigation bar and are then routed directly to the login form.
As soon as you have logged in, your current user name is displayed in the
header of the WBM. By clicking the “Logout” link you can log out again and then
log in again with a different user name. When using the WBM without logging in,
you are granted “Guest” access rights.
You must be logged into the WBM in order to have write or read access to (most)
parameters. This is checked with every access to the device.
If you have disabled cookies in your browser, you can continue to use the WBM
as long as you move directly inside it. However, if you fully reload the website
(e.g., with F5), you must log in again since the browser is then not able to store
the data of your login session.
Change passwords
The standard passwords are documented in these instructions and thus do not
offer adequate protection. Change the passwords to meet your particular needs.
See Section “Administration - Users Page.”
If you do not change these passwords, a warning will appear each time you call
up a website after logging in.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
104 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 105
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 42: Access Rights for WBM Pages
Navigation WBM page User
– Service Interface Configuration of Service Interface admin
– Reboot Reboot Controller admin
Package Server
– Firmware Backup Firmware Backup admin
– Firmware Restore Firmware Restore admin
– System Partition System Partition admin
Mass Storage Mass Storage admin
Software Uploads Software Uploads admin
Ports and Services
– Network Services Configuration of Network Services user
– NTP Client Configuration of NTP Client user
– PLC Runtime Services Configuration of PLC Runtime Services user
– SSH SSH Server Settings user
– TFTP TFTP Server user
– DHCP DHCP Configuration user
– DNS Configuration of DNS Service user
– MODBUS MODBUS Services Configuration user
Cloud Connectivity Configuration of Cloud Connectivity admin
SNMP
– General Configuration Configuration of general SNMP admin
parameters
– SNMP v1/v2c Configuration of SNMP v1/v2c parameters admin
– SNMP v3 Configuration of SNMP v3 Users admin
Diagnostic Diagnostic Information guest
Modem Configuration of internal 3G Modem admin
OpenVPN / IPsec Configuration of OpenVPN / IPsec admin
Security Security Settings admin
Legal Information
– Open Source Licenses Open Source Licenses guest
– WAGO Licenses WAGO Licenses guest
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
106 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The device name is displayed in the header of the browser window. When the
user has logged out, a [Login] button is displayed on the right in the header line,
when logged in a [Logout] button is displayed.
The navigation tree is shown on the left of the browser window. You can use this
navigation tree to go to the individual pages and, where provided, subpages
included in these pages. Some pages can only be called after a successful login.
To log in click the [Login] button and enter the user name and password in the
login window.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 107
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
A status area with the following elements is displayed on the right:
• WBM status:
This indicates whether the WBM is currently communicating with the device
in the background. In other words, one or more requests have been sent
and the browser is waiting for a response. Movement is then visible in the
graphic. This occurs when data is read on initial call-up of the page, when
the user has sent off a change form or when data is reloaded automatically
in cycles, e.g., the contents of the status area.
• Local Time:
Local time on the device
• Local Date:
Local date on the device
• PLC Switch:
Setting of the mode selector switch
• LEDs:
This indicates the status of the device LEDs. All LEDs are graphically
represented and are labeled with their particular designation (e.g., SYS,
RUN, ...). The following colors are possible:
- gray:
LED is off.
- half color:
The LED is flashing in the corresponding color. The other half of the
surface is then either gray or also colored. The latter case indicates that the
LED is flashing sequentially in different colors.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
108 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The contents of the individual pages and sub-pages are explained in the
following sections.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 109
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
This group displays the network and interface properties of the controller.
If the switch is enabled, one group (“Network Details X1/X2”) is shown for both
connections.
If the switch is disabled, a separate group (“Network Details X1” / “Network
Details X2”) is shown for each connection.
Table 44: WBM “Status Information Page – “Network Details Xn” Group(s)
Parameter Explanation
Status of the ETHERNET interface
State
(enabled/disabled)
Mac Address MAC address identifies and addresses the controller
Current IP address of the controller and (in brackets)
IP Address
the reference type (static/bootp/dhcp)
Subnet Mask Current subnet mask of the controller
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
110 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The settings for the boot project created with the programming software are given
on the “General PLC Runtime Configuration” page.
Table 45: WBM “General PLC Runtime Configuration” Page – “General PLC Runtime Configuration”
Group
Parameters Explanation
Select here the PLC runtime system to be enabled.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 111
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The home directory change only takes effect after restarting the controller. For
this purpose, use the WBM reboot function. Do not shut down the controller too
early!
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
112 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
All information about the enabled runtime system and PLC program created in
the programming software is provided on the “PLC Runtime Information” page.
Table 46: WBM “PLC Runtime Information” Page – “PLC Runtime” Group
Parameters Explanation
The version of the currently activated runtime
system is shown here.
Version If the runtime system is disabled, “None” is
displayed and the subsequent fields of this group
are disabled.
This shows the version number of the web server.
Web Server Version This field is only visible when CODESYS 2 is
enabled as the runtime system.
The PLC operating state is shown. This field is only
visible when CODESYS 2 is enabled as the runtime
State system.
STOP PLC program is not executed.
RUN PLC program is executed.
The number of tasks in the PLC program is shown.
Number of Tasks This field is only visible when CODESYS 2 is
enabled as the runtime system.
Table 47: WBM “PLC Runtime Information” Page – “Project Details” Group
Parameters Explanation
Date Display of project information that the programmer
entered in the PLC program (in programming
Title
software under Project > Project Information...).
Version The information only appears when a PLC program
Author is run.
Descriptive texts up to 1024 characters long are
Description given under “Description.”
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 113
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
One dedicated group is displayed for each task when the PLC program is
executed. As a rule, only the group title is displayed with the task number, the
task name and the task ID.
Click [+] to expand the group and display the following information.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
114 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The settings for the web visualization created in the runtime system are shown
on the “PLC WebVisu” page.
Table 49: WBM “PLC WebVisu” Page – “Web Server Configuration” Group
Parameters Explanation
CODESYS 2 Webserver This indicates the status (enabled/disabled) of the
State CODESYS 2 web server.
e!RUNTIME Webserver This indicates the status (enabled/disabled) of the
State e!RUNTIME web server.
Choose here whether the Web-based Management
or web visualization of the runtime system should be
displayed when only entering the IP address of the
controller.
Default Webserver
Web-based The Web-based Management is
Management displayed.
Web-Visu The web visualization of the runtime
system is displayed.
In its default setting, the WBM is called up when only entering the IP address.
To update the display after switching, enter the IP address again in the address
line of the web browser.
To display the web visualization, the web server must be enabled (in WBM under
“Ports and Services” -> “PLC Runtime Services”) and there must be a suitably
configured application.
Regardless of the default web server setting, the WBM can be called up at any
time with “https://<IP address>/wbm” and the web visualization with
“https://<IP address>/webvisu.”
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 115
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The settings for the general TCP/IP parameters are found on the “Configuration
of Host and Domain Name” page.
Table 50: WBM “Configuration of Host and Domain Name” Page – “Hostname” Group
Parameters Explanation
If you have selected dynamic assignment of an IP
Currently used address via DHCP, the name of the host currently
being used is displayed.
Enter here the hostname of your controller to be
used if the network interface is changed to a static
Configured
IP address or if no hostname is transmitted with a
DHCP response.
Table 51: WBM “Configuration of Host and Domain Name” Page – “Domain Name” Group
Parameters Explanation
The domain name currently used is displayed.
It may differ from the configured domain name if you
Currently used
have selected dynamic assignment of an IP address
via DHCP or BootP.
Enter the domain name.
Configured
The default entry is “localdomain.lan”.
If a domain name is supplied via a DHCP response, this is enabled in the system.
If there are several network interfaces with DHCP, the last received domain name
is always valid.
If only the domain name configured here is to be valid, the configuration of the
DHCP server must be adapted so that no domain names are transferred in the
DHCP response.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
116 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
</dg_
The TCP/IP settings for the ETHERNET interfaces are shown on the “TCP/IP
configuration” page.
If the switch is enabled, one group (“IP Configuration”) is shown for both
connections.
If the switch is disabled, a separate group (“IP Configuration X1” / “IP
Configuration X2”) is shown for each connection.
Table 52: WBM “TCP/IP Configuration” Page – “IP Configuration (Xn)” Group(s)
Parameters Explanation
Select a static or dynamic IP address.
Static IP Static IP addressing
Configuration Type
DHCP Dynamic IP addressing
BootP Dynamic IP addressing
Enter here a static IP address. This is enabled if
IP Address “Static IP” is enabled in the Configuration Type
field.
Enter the subnet mask. This is enabled if “Static IP”
Subnet Mask
is enabled in the Configuration Type field.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 117
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
You can configure two default gateways. The controller transmits all network data
not going to a station on the local network to a default gateway. First the gateway
with the lowest metric is addressed. If this is not reached, the second gateway is
used. The selection is random if the metric is the same.
A default gateway can also be configured via DHCP. These default gateways are
given the metric 10, by which they are normally used before the static gateways.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
118 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Click [Delete] to remove the selected DNS server. The change is effective
immediately.
Click [Add] to add the entered DNS server. The change is effective immediately.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 119
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The settings for Ethernet TCP/IP are located on the “Ethernet Configuration”
page.
One group (“Interface X1” / “Interface X2”) is displayed for each connection.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
120 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 56: WBM “Ethernet Configuration” Page – “Interface Xn” Groups
Parameter Explanation
Enabled You can enable or disable the interface.
When Autonegotiation is enabled, the connection
Autonegotiation on modalities are negotiated automatically with the peer
devices.
Select the transmission speed and the duplex
method:
10 Mbit half-duplex Information can only be
Speed/Duplex sent or received.
100 Mbit half-duplex
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 121
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
On the “Routing” page you can find settings and information on the routing
between the network interfaces.
Click the [Submit] button to apply the change. The changes take effect
immediately.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
122 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Each configured static route has its own area in the display.
Click the [Submit] button to apply the changes. The changes take effect
immediately.
To add a new route, click the [Add] button. The change takes effect immediately.
Click the [Delete] button to delete an existing route. The change takes effect
immediately.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 123
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Each dynamic route has its own area in the display. If no dynamic routes are
received via DHCP, “(no dynamic route)” appears.
Click the [Submit] button to apply the changes. The changes take effect
immediately.
Click the [Add] button to add a new entry. The change takes effect immediately.
Click the [Delete] button to delete an existing entry. The change takes effect
immediately.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
124 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Click the [Submit] button to apply the changes. The changes take effect
immediately.
Click the [Add] button to add a new entry. The change takes effect immediately.
Click the [Delete] button to delete an existing entry. The change takes effect
immediately.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 125
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 61: WBM “General Firewall Configuration” Page – “Global Firewall Parameters” Group
Parameters Explanation
Enables/disables the complete functionality of the
firewall. This setting has the highest priority. If the
firewall is disabled, all other settings have no direct
Firewall enabled entirely effect. The configuration of the other parameters is
possible nevertheless so that you can set the
firewall parameters correctly before you enable the
firewall.
ICMP echo broadcast Enable or disable the “ICMP echo broadcast”
protection protection.
Max. UDP connections per You can specify the maximum number of UDP
second connections per second.
Max. TCP connections per You can specify the maximum number of TCP
second connections per second.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
126 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
These settings in this group refer to the configuration of the firewall at IP level.
Table 62: WBM “General Firewall Configuration” Page – “Firewall Parameter Interface Xn” Group
Parameters Explanation
Firewall enabled for Enable or disable the firewall for the specific
Interface interface.
Enable or disable the “ICMP echo” protection for the
ICMP echo protection
respective interface.
You can specify the maximum number of “ICMP
ICMP echo limit per second
echo bursts” per second.
You can specify the maximum number of “ICMP
ICMP burst limit
echo bursts” per second.
(0 = disabled)
“0” = “Disabled”
Telnet
FTP
FTPS
HTTP
HTTPS
I/O-CHECK Enable or disable the
PLC Runtime firewall for the respective
service.
PLC WebVisu –
Service enabled The services themselves
direct link (port 8080)
must be enabled or
SSH disabled separately on the
TFTP “Ports and Services” page.
BootP/DHCP
DNS
MODBUS TCP
MODBUS UDP
SNMP
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 127
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
</dg_
The “MAC Address Filter Whitelist” contains a default entry with the following
values:
If you enable the default entry, this already allows communication between
different WAGO devices in the network.
Table 63: WBM “Configuration of MAC Address Filter” Page – “Global MAC Address Filter State”
Group
Parameters Explanation
Enable or disable the global MAC address filter
Filter enabled
here.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
128 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 64: WBM “Configuration of MAC Address Filter” Page – “MAC Address Filter State Xn” Group
Parameters Explanation
Enable or disable here the MAC address filter for the
Filter enabled
specific interface.
Table 65: WBM “Configuration of MAC Address Filter” Page – “MAC Address Filter Whitelist” Group
Parameters Explanation
MAC address Displays the MAC address of the relevant list entry.
This displays the MAC mask of the relevant list
MAC mask
entry.
Enable or disable the filter for the relevant list entry
Filter enabled
here.
…
Enter here the MAC address for a new list entry.
MAC address
You can enter 10 filters.
MAC mask Enter the MAC mask for the new list entry here.
Enable or disable the filter for the new list entry
Filter enabled
here.
Click the appropriate [Delete] button to remove an existing list entry. The change
is effective immediately.
Click [Add] to accept a new list entry. You can enter 10 filters. The change is
effective immediately.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 129
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 66: WBM “Configuration of User Filter” Page – “User Filter” Group
Parameters Explanation
Count The number of configured user filters is displayed.
Table 67: WBM “Configuration of User Filter” Page – “User Filter n” Group
Parameters Explanation
The source IP address for the respective filter entry
Source IP address
is displayed.
This displays the source network for the
Source netmask
corresponding filter entry.
The source port number for the respective filter entry
Source port
is displayed.
The destination IP address for the respective filter
Destination IP address
entry is displayed.
The destination network mask for the respective
Destination subnet mask
filter entry is displayed.
The designation port number for the respective filter
Destination port
entry is displayed.
The permitted protocols for the respective filter is
Protocol
displayed.
The permitted interfaces for the respective filter are
Input interface
displayed.
Hier wird angezeigt, ob der Netzwerkteilnehmer
Policy durch den Filter zugelassen oder ausgeschlossen
ist.
Click the appropriate [Delete] button to remove a configured filter. The change is
effective immediately.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
130 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 68: WBM “Configuration of User Filter” Page – “Add New User Filter” Group
Parameters Explanation
Select here whether the network devices is to be
allowed or excluded by the filter.
Policy
Allow The network device is permitted.
Drop The network device is excluded.
Enter here the source IP address for the new filter
Source IP address
entry.
Enter here the source network mask for the new
Source netmask
filter entry.
Enter here the source port address for the new filter
Source port
entry.
Enter here the destination IP address for the new
Destination IP address
filter entry.
Enter here the destination network mask for the new
Destination subnet mask
filter entry.
Enter the destination port number for the new filter
Destination port
entry.
Enter here the permitted protocols for the new filter.
Protocol TCP The TCP service is permitted.
UDP The UDP service is permitted.
Enter here the permitted interfaces for the new filter.
X1 The X1 interface is permitted.
Input interface
X2 The X2 interface is permitted.
VPN The VPN interface is permitted.
To accept the new filter click [Add]. The change is effective immediately.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 131
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The settings for date and time are shown on the “Configuration of Time and Date”
page.
Table 69: WBM “Configuration of Time and Date” Page – “Date on Device” Group
Parameters Explanation
Local Set date.
Table 70: WBM “Configuration of Time and Date” Page – “Time on Device” Group
Parameters Explanation
Local Set local time.
UTC Set GMT time.
12 h format For switching between 12-hour and 24-hour time
display
Click [Change time] to apply change to the time. The change is effective
immediately.
Click [Change format] to apply change to the time format. The change is
effective immediately.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
132 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
You can specify the appropriate time zone for your location in this group.
The total number of possible time zones is over 500. A complete listing would
exceed the scope of this documentation.
Due to the large number of time zones, the selection is limited via the “Time
Zone” parameter.
You can select further time zones with the “TZ String” parameter.
Table 71: WBM “Configuration of Time and Date” Page – “Time Zone” Group
Parameters Explanation
Specify the appropriate time zone for your location.
AST/ADT “Atlantic Standard Time,” Halifax
“Eastern Standard Time,” New York,
EST/EDT
Toronto
“Central Standard Time,” Chicago,
CST/CDT
Winnipeg
“Mountain Standard Time,” Denver,
MST/MDT
Edmonton
“Pacific Standard Time,” Los Angeles,
Time zone PST/PDT
Whitehouse:
Greenwich Mean Time,” GB, P, IRL,
GMT/BST
IS, …
“Central European Time,” B, DK, D,
CET/CEST*
F, I, CRO, NL, …
“Eastern European Time,” BUL, FI,
EET/EEST
GR, TR, …
CST “China Standard Time”
JST “Japan/Korea Standard Time”
* Default setting
Click [Change] to apply time zone change. The change is effective immediately.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 133
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
In this group you can enter a time zone that is not contained in the “Time Zone”
selection.
If the controller can associate the TZ string entered with a known time zone that
had been missing from the “Time Zone” selection, this time zone is then also
added to the “Time Zone” list.
You can find information on time zones and the corresponding “TZ strings” on the
Internet.
For example, to indicate the pure UTC time, enter the TZ string “UTC0.”
If no unique association is possible, the text “Unknown” is displayed for the “Time
Zone” selection.
Table 72: WBM “Configuration of Time and Date” Page – “TZ String” Group
Parameters Explanation
TZ string You can enter the name of the time zone or the
country and city here.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
134 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
</dg_
Change passwords
Default passwords are documented in these instructions and therefore do not
offer adequate protection! Change the passwords to meet your particular needs.
Table 73: WBM “Configuration of the users for the Web-based Management” Page – “Change
Password for Selected User” Group
Parameters Explanation
Select the user (“user” or “admin”) for new password
Select User
assignment.
Enter the new password for the user selected under
“Select User”.
The following ASCII characters for passwords are
New Password
valid: a … z, A … Z, 0 … 9 and spaces. These
special characters are also valid:
]!"#$%&'()*+,./:;<=>?@[\^_`{|}~-
Confirm password Enter the new password again for confirmation.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 135
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
</dg_
You can create a bootable image on the “Create Bootable Image” page.
The active partition that boot-up was performed from is displayed in brackets in
the heading.
Table 74: WBM “Create Bootable Image” page – “Create bootable image from active partition” Group
Parameters Explanation
The possible destination partition that an image will
be saved to is displayed. Depending on which
medium has been booted, the following destination
is available for selection after boot-up for the image
Destination to be generated:
System was booted Target partition for
from “bootable image”
Memory Card Internal Flash
Internal memory Memory Card
Define the size of the image on the memory card.
This field is only visible when “Memory Card” is set
as the target.
Size of created image Reduced to The storage space of the copied
content image is kept as small as possible.
The image is created so that the
Full card size
entire memory card is filled.
Once the destination has been determined and output, it is then checked and the
results of this check are displayed below the settings:
Click [Start Copy] to start the copying procedure. If the outcome of the test is
positive, copying begins immediately. If errors have been detected, a
corresponding message is displayed and copying is not started. If warnings have
been issued, these are displayed again and you must then confirm that you still
wish to continue.
</dg_
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
136 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 137
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
</dg_
The settings for the serial interface are shown on the “Configuration of Serial
Interface RS232” page.
You can specify the application that the serial interface is assigned to after the
next controller reboot.
Table 75: WBM “Configuration of Serial Interface RS232” Page – “Assign Owner of Serial Interface”
Group
Parameters Explanation
Specify that the serial interface is assigned to the
Linux® Console
Linux® console.
Specify that the serial interface is not to be assigned
Unassigned (usage by
to any particular application and is available, so that
applications, libraries,
the CODESYS program, for example, can access it
CODESYS)
via function blocks.
Click [Change Owner] to apply the change. The change only takes effect after
restarting the controller. For this purpose, use the WBM reboot function. Do not
shut down the controller too early!
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
138 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The settings for the service interface are shown on the “Configuration of the
Service Interface” page.
You can specify the application to which the service interface is assigned after
the next controller reboot.
Table 76: WBM “Configuration of Serial Interface RS-232” page – “Assign Owner of Service
Interface” Group
Parameters Explanation
Specify that the service interface is used for the
WAGO Service
WAGO Service communication or runtime system
Communication
communication.
Specify that the service interface is assigned to the
Linux® Console
Linux® console.
Specify that the service interface is not to be
Unassigned (usage by
assigned to any application and is available, so that
applications, libraries,
the CODESYS program, for example, can access it
CODESYS)
via function blocks.
Click [Change Owner] to apply the change. The changes only take effect after
restarting the controller. For this purpose, use the WBM reboot function. Do not
shut down the controller too early!
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 139
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
</dg_
The settings for the system reboot are shown on the “Reboot Controller” page.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
140 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
You can find the controller data backup settings on the “Firmware Backup” page.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 141
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
142 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The settings for restoring the controller data are shown on the “Firmware
Restore” page.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 143
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Reset by restore
A reset is performed when the system or settings are restored by CODESYS!
Click the [Browse] button to select the files in Explorer. The buttons only appear
if the network is selected as the data source.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
144 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
</dg_
The settings for specifying the partition that the system will be started from are
shown on the “System Partition” page.
Click [Activate Partition] to start the system from a different partition at the next
controller reboot.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 145
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
</dg_
A group containing information about the storage volume is displayed for each
storage volume that is found, along with an additional group for formatting (when
this is possible).
The group title contains the designation for the storage volume (“SD card” or
“Internal Flash”) and, if this storage volume is also the active partition, the text
“Active Partition”.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
146 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
</dg_
The settings for a device update are shown on the “Software Uploads” page.
Table 81: WBM “Software Uploads” Page – “Upload New Software” Group
Parameter Explanation
You can select fieldbus software, program licenses
Software Files and update scripts, for example, for transfer from a
PC to the controller.
To transfer the selected file to the controller, click [Start Upload] button.
Table 82: WBM “Software Uploads” Page – “Activate New Software” Group
Parameter Explanation
This shows the file name of the transferred software
package. If no new uploaded software package is
Software File
present on the controller, the message “No upload
file exists” is displayed.
Select here the action required.
Activate The transferred software package is
activated.
Force Installs a transferred software package
(Manual that cannot be activated with “Activate.”
reboot Required for activating a controller
Action
afterward reboot.
s needed) The software package is activated on
reboot.
Discard The transferred software package is
(delete deleted again by the controller.
upload)
To perform the action, click the [Submit] button. The process starts immediately.
The file with the software package is deleted again after the installation is
completed or when the controller is restarted.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 147
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The settings for various services are shown on the “Configuration of Network
Services” page.
Besides enabling/disabling the individual services, you can also limit the services
for each particular interface via the firewall on the “General Firewall
Configuration” page.
Click the [Submit] button to apply the changes. The change takes effect
immediately.
Click the [Submit] button to apply the changes. The change takes effect
immediately.
Click the [Submit] button to apply the changes. The change takes effect
immediately.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
148 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Click the [Submit] button to apply the changes. The change takes effect
immediately.
Click the [Submit] button to apply the changes. The change takes effect
immediately.
Click the [Submit] button to apply the changes. The change takes effect
immediately.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 149
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 89: WBM “Configuration of Network Services” Page – “OPC UA” Group
Parameter Explanation
Service active Enable/disable the OPC UA service here.
Click the [Submit] button to apply the changes. The change only takes effect
once the controller restarts. For this purpose, use the WBM reboot function. Do
not shut down the controller too early!
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
150 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
</dg_
The settings for the NTP service are shown on the “Configuration of NTP Client”
page.
Table 90: WBM “Configuration of NTP Client” Page – “NTP Client Configuration” Group
Parameters Explanation
Service enabled Enable/disabled time update.
This displays whether time data was accessible and
updated via NTP.
This field is only displayed with the NTP service
Service Result enabled.
Time server not The time data was not yet
available until now updated.
Time server available The time data was updated.
Enter here the IP addresses of up to 4 time servers.
Time server No. 1 is requested first of all. If no data
Time Server n
is accessible via this server, time server No. 2 is
requested etc.
Update interval (sec) Specify here the update interval of the time server.
The NTP servers assigned if necessary by DHCP
Additionally used
(or BootP) are displayed. If no NTP server has been
(assigned by DHCP)
assigned by DHCP (or BootP), “none” is displayed.
Click the [Submit] button to apply the changes. The changes are effective
immediately.
To update the time immediately, irrespective of the update interval, click [Update
Time Now].
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 151
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The settings for various services of the activated runtime system are shown on
the “Configuration of PLC Runtime Services” page.
Table 91: WBM “Configuration of PLC Runtime Services” Page – “General Configuration” Group
Parameter Explanation
Port Authentication
Specify the new password for port authentication.
Password
Confirm Password Enter the new password again for confirmation.
Table 92: WBM “Configuration of CODESYS Services” Page – “CODESYS 2 Web Server” Group
Parameter Explanation
This displays the status (enabled/disabled) of the
CODESYS 2 State
CODESYS 2 runtime system.
Enable or disable the CODESYS 2 web server for
Web server enabled
the CODESYS web visualization here.
Enable or disable the communication between the
Communication enabled CODESYS 2 runtime system and the CODESYS 2
programming system.
Enter here the port number for communication with
Communication Port
the CODESYS 2 programming system. Default
Number
value is 2455.
Define here whether port authentication is enabled.
If this is enabled, the password specified under
Port authentication enabled
“General Configuration” must be entered when
logging in via CODESYS 2 IDE.
Table 93: WBM “Configuration of CODESYS Services” Page – “e!RUNTIME Web Server” Group
Parameter Explanation
This displays the status of the e!RUNTIME system
e!RUNTIME State
(enabled/disabled).
Enable or disable the e!WEBSERVER for the
Web server enabled
e!RUNTIME web visualization here.
Enter here whether a login is required for connecting
Port authentication enabled to the device. The user name is admin and the
password specified at “General Configuration.”
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
152 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 153
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The settings for the SSH service are shown on the “SSH Server Settings” page.
Table 94: WBM “SSH Server Settings” Page – “SSH Server” Group
Parameter Explanation
Service active You can enable/disable the SSH server here.
Port Number Specify the port number here.
Allow root login You can enable or inhibit root access.
Activate or deactivate the password query function
Allow password login
here.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
154 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
</dg_
The settings for the TFTP service are shown on the “TFTP Server” page.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 155
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The settings for the DHCP service are shown on the “DHCP Configuration” page.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
156 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The settings for the DNS service are shown on the “Configuration of DNS
Service” page.
Table 97: WBM “Configuration of DNS Service” Page – “DNS Service” Group
Parameter Explanation
You can enable/disable the DNS server service
Service active
here.
Select here the operating mode of the DNS server:
Requests are buffered to optimize
Mode Proxy
throughput.
Relay All requests are routed directly.
This displays the static assignments of IP addresses
Static hosts to names. If no assignment was defined, “No static
hosts configured” is displayed.
Enter here a new static assignment, e.g.,
New static host “192.168.1.20:hostname.”
You can enter 10 assignments.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 157
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The settings for various MODBUS services are shown on the “MODBUS Services
Configuration” page. The groups are only visible if the e!RUNTIME system is
enabled. Otherwise an information text is displayed.
Table 98: WBM “MODBUS Services Configuration” Page – “MODBUS TCP” Group
Parameter Explanation
Service active Disable or enable the MODBUS/TCP service here.
Click the [Submit] button to apply the changes. The change is effective
immediately.
Table 99: WBM “MODBUS Configuration Services” Page – “MODBUS UDP” Group
Parameter Explanation
Service active Disable/enable the MODBUS-UDP service here.
Click the [Submit] button to apply the changes. The change is effective
immediately.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
158 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
On the page “Configuration of Cloud Connectivity” you can find the settings and
information for cloud access.
Table 100: WBM “Configuration of Cloud Connectivity” Page – “Software Version” Group
Parameter Explanation
Version The cloud plug-in version is displayed.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 159
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
160 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 102: WBM “Configuration of Cloud Connectivity” Page – “Settings” Group
Parameter Explanation
Enter the password for cloud service authentication
here.
Password This input field is only visible if you have selected
“MTTQ AnyCloud” or “IBM Bluemix” as the cloud
platform.
Enter the path here to the file encoded in PEM
format that is used for cloud service authentication.
Certification file This input field is only visible if you have selected
“MTTQ AnyCloud” or “Amazon Web Services
(AWS)” as the cloud platform.
Enter the path here to the file encoded in PEM
format that contains the private key for cloud service
authentication.
Key file
This input field is only visible if you have selected
“MTTQ AnyCloud” or “Amazon Web Services
(AWS)” as the cloud platform.
Specify here in which memory the cache for the data
telegrams should be created.
This selection field is only enabled if a correctly
Cache mode
formatted SD card is inserted.
(You can find more information in Application Note
A500920.)
Specify here whether a device info message should
be generated that informs the cloud service of the
basic configuration of the PFC.
(You can find more information in Application Note
Device info A500920.)
This check box is only enabled if you have selected
“Azure,” “MTTQ AnyCloud,” “IBM Bluemix” or
“Amazon Web Services (AWS)” as the cloud
platform.
Specify here whether device state messages should
be generated that inform the cloud service about
changes in the mode selector switch and the LEDs.
(You can find more information in Application Note
Device status A500920.)
This check box is only enabled if you have selected
“Azure,” “MTTQ AnyCloud,” “IBM Bluemix” or
“Amazon Web Services (AWS)” as the cloud
platform.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 161
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 102: WBM “Configuration of Cloud Connectivity” Page – “Settings” Group
Parameter Explanation
Specify here whether the integrated standard
commands should be supported.
(You can find the list of standard commands in
Application Note A500920.)
Standard commands If the check box is disabled, only the commands
defined in the IEC program are supported.
This check box is only enabled if you have selected
“Azure,” “MTTQ AnyCloud” or “Amazon Web
Services (AWS)” as the cloud platform.
The changes only take effect after the controller restarts. For this purpose, use
the WBM reboot function. Do not shut down the controller too early!
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
162 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The general settings for SNMP are given on the “Configuration of General SNMP
Parameters” page.
Table 103: WBM “Configuration of General SNMP Parameters” Page – “General SNMP
Configuration” Group
Parameter Explanation
Service active Activate/deactivate the SNMP service.
Name of device Enter here the device name (sysName).
Description Enter here the device description (sysDescription).
Physical location Enter here the location of the device (sysLocation).
Contact Enter here the email contact address (sysContact).
Click the [Submit] button to apply the changes. The changes only take effect
after restarting the controller. For this purpose, use the WBM reboot function. Do
not shut down the controller too early!
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 163
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The general settings for SNMP v1/v2c are shown on the “Configuration of SNMP
v1/v2c Parameters” page.
Table 104: WBM “Configuration of SNMP v1/v2c Parameters” Page – “SNMP v1/v2c Manager
Configuration” Group
Parameter Explanation
It is displayed the SNMP protocol for v1/v2c is
Protocol enabled activated. The local community name is deleted
when the protocol is deactivated.
Specify here the community name for the SNMP
manager configuration. The community name can
establish relationships between SNMP managers
and agents who are respectively referred to as
“Community” and who control identification and
Local Community Name access between SNMP participants.
The community name can be up to 32 characters
long and must not include spaces.
To use the SNMP protocol, a valid community name
must always be specified. The default community
name is “public.”
Click [Change] to apply changes. The changes only take effect after restarting
the controller. For this purpose, use the WBM reboot function. Do not shut down
the controller too early!
Table 105: WBM “Configuration of SNMP v1/v2c Parameters” Page – “Actually Configured Trap
Receivers” Group
Parameter Explanation
Count This displays number of configured trap receivers.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
164 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
A dedicated group with the following information is displayed for each trap
receiver:
Table 106: WBM “Configuration of SNMP v1/v2c Parameters” Page – “Trap Receiver n” Group(s)
Parameter Explanation
The IP address for the trap receiver (management
IP Address
station) is displayed here.
This displays the community name for the trap
Community Name receiver configuration. The community name can be
evaluated by the trap receiver.
This displays the SNMP version, via which the traps
Version are sent: v1 or v2c (traps higher than v3 are
displayed in a separate form).
Click [Delete] to delete the trap receiver. The changes only take effect after
restarting the controller. For this purpose, use the WBM reboot function. Do not
shut down the controller too early!
Table 107: WBM “Configuration of SNMP v1/v2c Parameters” Page – “Add New Trap Receiver”
Group
Parameter Explanation
Specify the IP address for the new trap receiver
IP Address
(management station) here.
Specify here the community name for the new trap
receiver configuration. The community name can be
Community Name evaluated by the trap receiver.
The community name can be up to 32 characters
long and must not include spaces.
Specify the SNMP version that will send the traps:
Version v1 or v2c (traps higher than v3 are configured in a
separate form).
Click [Add] to add a new trap receiver. The changes only take effect after
restarting the controller. For this purpose, use the WBM reboot function. Do not
shut down the controller too early!
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 165
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
</dg_
The general settings for SNMP v3 are shown on the “Configuration of SNMP v3
Users” page.
Table 108: WBM “Configuration of SNMP v3” Page – “Actually Configured v3 Users” Group
Parameters Explanation
Count The number of configured v3 users is displayed.
Table 109: WBM “Configuration of SNMP v3 Users” Page – “v3 User n” Group(s)
Parameters Explanation
Security Authentication
The user name is displayed.
Name
The authentication type for the SNMP v3 packets is
displayed here.
Click [Delete] to delete the user. The changes only take effect after restarting the
controller. For this purpose, use the WBM reboot function. Do not shut down the
controller too early!
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
166 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 110: WBM “Configuration of SNMP v3 Users” Page – “Add New v3 User” Group
Parameters Explanation
Enter the user name here. This name must be
unique; a pre-existing user name is not accepted
Security Authentication
when entered here. The security authentication
Name
name can have a maximum 32 characters, without
any spaces.
Specify the authentication type for the SNMP v3
packets.
Click [Add] to add a new user. The changes only take effect after restarting the
controller. For this purpose, use the WBM reboot function. Do not shut down the
controller too early!
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 167
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
</dg_
The settings for displaying diagnostic messages are shown on the “Diagnostic
Information” page.
To refresh the display or to enable cyclic refresh, click the [Refresh] button. This
button is only visible if the cyclic refresh is not enabled or stopped.
To enable cyclic refresh, click the [Start] button. The button is only visible if cyclic
refresh is enabled and has not yet started.
To stop cyclic refresh again, click the [Stop] button. The button is only visible if
cyclic refresh is enabled.
The cyclical update is performed for as long as the “Diagnostic” page is opened.
If you change the WBM page, the update is stopped until you call up the
“Diagnostic” Page again.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
168 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 112: WBM “Configuration of internal 3G Modem” Page – “SIM Authentication” Group
Parameters Explanation
The status of the SIM authentication is displayed.
Ready Authentication was successful.
The PIN must be entered.
PIN requested The number of remaining
State
attempts is displayed.
The PIN was not entered
PUK requested correctly, the PUK must be
specified along with a new PIN.
Enter the PIN.
PIN
The field is only displayed if PIN entry is required.
Enter the PUK.
PUK
The field is only displayed if PUK try is required.
To apply the entries, click the [Submit] button. The changes will be effective
immediately.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 169
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 113: WBM “Configuration of internal 3G Modem” Page – “Mobile Network Configuration” Group
Parameters Explanation
State The network status is displayed.
Signal Quality (%) The current signal quality is displayed.
The provider and network type currently in use are
Operator
displayed.
Select the mode for selecting the provider used:
The network is selected by the
Automatic modem itself based on the SIM
card settings.
Automatic – Like “Automatic”, but the UMTS
UMTS preferred network is preferred.
Automatic – Like “Automatic”, but the GSM
GSM preferred network is preferred.
Automatic – Like “Automatic”, but restricted to
UMTS only the UMTS network.*
Selection Mode
Automatic – Like “Automatic”, but restricted to
GSM only the GSM network.*
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
170 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 114: WBM “Configuration of internal 3G Modem” Page – “Provider List” Group
Parameters Explanation
<Provider> | <Network> All available providers with the respective network,
<ID>, <Status> its ID and the current status are displayed.
Refreshing the provider list may take some time (approx. 1 minute), during which
the WBM waits for the modem response. The process is canceled after 2 minutes
or immediately if the modem executes another, non-interruptible action.
The list is therefore refreshed only on request, either by clicking the [Refresh]
button or setting the Selection Mode to “Manual”.
The selection list for the provider (“Mobile Network Configuration” Group) can
only be filled in when the provider list has been refreshed.
In normal operation, the provider list changes only rarely, i.e., continuous
refreshing is not required.
Table 115: WBM “Configuration of internal 3G Modem” Page – “Network Package Service” Group
Parameters Explanation
The registry state of the “Network Package Service”
State
is displayed.
Enter the APN access point (Access Point Name) of
APN
the SIM card provider.
Enter the user name for the access point of the SIM
User
card provider.
Enter the password for the access point of the SIM
Password
card provider.
Select the authentication type:
None No authentication
Password Authentication
PAP
Protocol
Authentication Type
Challenge Handshake
CHAP
Authentication Protocol
When possible, the secure CHAP
PAP or CHAP
is used, otherwise PAP.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 171
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 116: WBM “Configuration of internal 3G Modem” Page – “Upload and activate new Modem
Software” Group
Parameters Explanation
Currently used The current modem firmware version is displayed.
New Software Enter the firmware version to be installed.
To install and enable the firmware, click the [Start Upload] button. The changes
will be effective immediately.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
172 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The general settings for SNMP v1/v2c are shown on the “Configuration of SNMP
v1/v2c Parameters” page.
Table 117: WBM “Configuration of OpenVPN and IPsec” Page – “OpenVPN” Group
Parameters Explanation
The current status of the OpenVPN service is
displayed.
Current State
stopped The service is disabled.
running The service is enabled.
OpenVPN enabled Enable or disable the OpenVPN service.
Select an OpenVPN configuration file to be
openvpn.config
transferred from PC to controller or vice versa.
To transfer the selected file from the PC to the controller, click [Start Upload]
button.
To transfer the selected file from the controller to the PC, click [Start Download]
button.
The changes only take effect after restarting the controller. For this purpose, use
the WBM reboot function. Do not shut down the controller too early!
Table 118: WBM “Configuration of OpenVPN and IPsec” Page – “IPsec” Group
Parameters Explanation
The current status of the IPsec service is displayed.
Current State stopped The service is disabled.
running The service is enabled.
IPsec enabled Enable or disable the IPsec service.
Select an IPsec configuration file to be transferred
ipsec.config
from PC to controller or vice versa.
Select an IPsec configuration file to be transferred
ipsec.secrets
from PC to controller.
To transfer the selected file to the controller, click [Start Upload] button.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 173
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
To transfer the selected file from the controller to the PC, click [Start Download]
button.
The changes only take effect after restarting the controller. For this purpose, use
the WBM reboot function. Do not shut down the controller too early!
Table 119: WBM “Configuration of OpenVPN and IPsec” Page – “Certificate Upload” Group
Parameters Explanation
Select an certificate for transfer from a PC to the
New Certificate
controller.
New Private Key Select a key for transfer from a PC to the controller.
To transfer the selected file to the controller, click [Start Upload] button. The
changes will be effective immediately.
The certificates are saved in the directory “/etc/certificates/” and the keys in the
directory “/etc/certificates/keys/”.
Table 120: WBM “Configuration of OpenVPN and IPsec” Page – “Certificate List” Group
Parameters Explanation
The loaded certificates are displayed. If no
<certificate name> certificate has been loaded. “No certificates existing”
is displayed.
Table 121: WBM “Configuration of OpenVPN and IPsec” Page – “Private Key List” Group
Parameters Explanation
The loaded keys are displayed. If no keys has been
<key name>
loaded. “No keys existing” is displayed.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
174 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The network security settings are found on the “Security Settings” page.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 175
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The licence conditions for the open source software used for the controller are
listed in alphabetical order on the “Open Source Licenses” page.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
176 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The licence conditions for the WAGO software used in the controller are listed on
the “WAGO Licenses” page.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 177
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
To establish a connection via the serial interface, set the baud rate to 115200
baud in the terminal program. The settings for data bits, stop bits and parity do
not need to be adjusted.
To launch the CBM, log in to the Linux® console and enter the command "cbm"
(case sensitive).
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
178 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 123: CBM Menu Structure
Menu Hierarchy
1. Host-/Domain Name
2. TCP/IP
0. Back to Networking Menu
1. IP Address
2. Default Gateway
3. DNS Server
3. Ethernet
0. Back to Networking Menu
1. Switch Configuration
2. Ethernet Ports
0. Back to Ethernet Menu
1. Interface X1
2. Interface X2
4. Firewall
0. Back to Main Menu
1. General Configuration
2. MAC Address Filter
3. User Filter
5. Clock
0. Back to Main Menu
1. Date on device (local)
2. Time on device (local)
3. Time on device (UTC)
4. Clock Display Mode
5. Timezone
6. TZ-String
6. Administration
0. Back to Main Menu
1. Users
2. Create Image
3. Owner of Serial Interface
4. Reboot Controller
7. Package Server
0. Back to Main Menu
1. Firmware Backup
2. Firmware Restore
3. System Partition
8. Mass Storage
0. Back to Main Menu
1. Internal Flash (active partition)
9. Software Uploads
0. Back to Main Menu
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 179
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 123: CBM Menu Structure
Menu Hierarchy
1. Update Script
10. Ports and Services
0. Back to Main Menu
1. Telnet
2. FTP
3. FTPS
4. HTTP
5. HTTPS
6. NTP
7. SSH
8. TFTP
9. DHCPD
10. DNS
11. IOCHECK PORT
12. Modbus TCP
13. Modbus UDP
14. PLC Runtime Services
11. SNMP
0. Back to Main Menu
1. General SNMP Configuration
2. SNMP v1/v2c Manager Configuration
3. SNMP v1/v2c Trap Receiver Configuration
4. SNMP v3 Configuration
5. SNMP firewalling
6. Secure SNMP firewalling
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
180 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
This menu contains other submenus with information on the controller and
network.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 181
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
In this submenu, the network and interface properties of the controller are
displayed.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
182 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
This menu contains other submenus with information and settings for the runtime
system.
This submenu contains other submenus with information on the runtime system
and PLC program.
Menu items 2 … 6 only appear if CODESYS 2 is set as the runtime system.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 183
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 129: “PLC Runtime” > “Information” > “Runtime Version” Submenu
Parameters Explanation
The version of the currently enabled runtime system
Version is shown. If the runtime system is disabled, “None”
is displayed.
Table 130: “PLC Runtime” > “Information” > “Webserver Version” Submenu
Parameters Explanation
Version The Webserver version is displayed.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
184 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
In this submenu, the number of tasks in the PLC program are displayed.
The submenu only appears when CODESYS 2 is enabled as the runtime system.
Table 132: “PLC Runtime” > “Information” > “Number of Tasks” Submenu
Parameters Explanation
Number of Tasks The number of tasks in the PLC program is shown.
Table 133: “PLC Runtime” > “Information” > “Project Details” Submenu
Parameters Explanation
Date Display of project information that the programmer
Title entered in the PLC program (in the programming
software under Project > Project Information ...)
Version
Descriptive text with up to 1024 characters is
Author displayed under “Description”.
Description
In this submenu, tasks from the PLC program are displayed. An entry is
generated for each task.
The submenu only appears when CODESYS 2 is enabled as the runtime system.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 185
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 135: “PLC Runtime” > “Information” > “Tasks” > “Task n” Submenu
Parameters Explanation
Cycle count Number of task cycles since the system start
Cycle time (µsec) Currently measured task cycle time for the task
Minimum task cycle time for the task since the
Cycle time min (µsec)
system start
Maximum task cycle time for the task since the
Cycle time max (µsec)
system start
Cycle time avg (µsec) Average task cycle time since the system start
Status Task status (e.g., RUN, STOP)
Mode Task execution mode (e.g., in cycles)
Priority Set task priority
Interval (msec) Set task interval
This submenu contains other submenus with general settings for the runtime
system.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
186 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 137: “PLC Runtime” > “General Configuration” > “PLC Runtime Version” Submenu
Menu Item Explanation
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
1. None No runtime system is enabled.
2. CODESYS 2 The CODESYS 2 runtime system is enabled.
3. e!RUNTIME The e!RUNTIME runtime system is enabled.
In this submenu, define if the home directory for the runtime system should be
moved to the memory card.
Table 138: “PLC Runtime” > “General Configuration” > “Home Dir On SD Card” Submenu
Menu Item Explanation
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
1. Enable The home directory is moved to the memory card.
2. Disable The home directory is stored in the internal memory.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 187
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
This submenu contains information and settings for the Web visualization.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
188 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
This menu contains other submenus with settings for the network configuration.
This submenu contains the “Hostname” and “Domain Name” submenu with
setting options for the general TCP/IP parameters.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 189
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
In this submenu, you can set the domain name of the controller.
Table 143: “Networking” > “Host/Domain Name” > “Domain Name” Submenu
Parameters Explanation
Enter the domain name.
Enter new Domain Name
The default entry is “localdomain.lan”.
This submenu contains other submenus with the TCP/IP settings for the
ETHERNET interfaces.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
190 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
This submenu contains other submenus with settings for the ETHERNET
interfaces.
Table 146: “Networking” > “TCP/IP” > “IP Address” Submenu > “Xn”
Menu Item Submenu Item / Explanation
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
Select a static or dynamic IP address.
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
Static IP addressing
1. Type of IP Address When selecting static addressing, the
1. Static IP
Configuration IP address and subnet mask are then
retrieved.
2. DHCP Dynamic IP addressing
3. BootP Dynamic IP addressing
2. IP Address Enter here a static IP address.
3. Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 191
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
This submenu contains other submenus with settings for the default gateway.
Table 148: “Networking” > “TCP/IP” > “Default Gateway” > “Default Gateway n” Submenu
Menu Item Submenu Item / Explanation
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
Set here whether the selected default gateway is to
be used.
1. State 0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
1. Disabled The default gateway is not used.
2. Enabled The default gateway is used.
2. Gateway IP Address Enter the address of the default gateway.
Set here a number as the metric.
3. Gateway Metric The default value for the metric is 20, the lowest
value is 0, the highest value is 4.294.967.295.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
192 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
This submenu contains other submenus with settings for the ETHERNET
configuration.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 193
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
This submenu contains other submenus with settings for the ETHERNET
interfaces.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
194 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
This submenu contains the settings for the selected ETHERNET interface.
Table 153: “Networking” > “Ethernet” > “Ethernet Ports” > “Interface Xn” Submenu
Submenu Submenu Item / Explanation
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
Set here whether the selected port is to be used.
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
1. Port
1. Disabled The port is not used.
2. Enabled The port is used.
Set here whether the Autonegotiation function is
enabled for the selected port.
2. Autonegotiation 0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
1. Disabled Autonegotiation is disabled.
2. Enabled Autonegotiation is enabled.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 195
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
This menu contains other submenus for the firewall functionality settings.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
196 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 197
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
This submenu contains the firewall settings on the IP level for the selected
interface.
Table 156: “Firewall” > “General Configuration” > “Interface xxx” Submenu
Menu Item Submenu Item / Explanation
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
Enable or disable the firewall for the selected
interface.
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
1. Interface state The firewall for the selected interface
1. Open
is disabled.
The firewall for the selected interface
2. Filtered
is enabled.
Enable or disable the “ICMP echo” protection for the
respective interface.
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
2. ICMP Policy The “ICMP echo” protection is
1. Accept
disabled.
The “ICMP echo” protection is
2. Drop
enabled.
You can specify the maximum number of “ICMP
3. ICMP Limit pings” per second.
“0” = “Disabled”
You can specify the maximum number of “ICMP
4. ICMP Burst echo bursts” per second.
“0” = “Disabled”
5. Telnet
6. FTP
7. FTPS
8. HTTP
9. HTTPS
10. I/O-CHECK
11. PLC Runtime Enable or disable the firewall for the respective
service.
12. PLC WebVisu –
The services themselves must be enabled or
direct link (port 8080)
disabled separately on the “Ports and Services”
13. SSH page.
14. TFTP
15. BootP/DHCP
16. DNS
17. MODBUS TCP
18. MODBUS UDP
19. SNMP
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
198 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Click [<OK>] to apply the entry.
Click [<Abort>] to discard the entry.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 199
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
This submenu contains the settings for the MAC address filter.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
200 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
7.8.2.5.4 “MAC Address Filter” > “MAC address filter whitelist” Submenu
Table 158: “Firewall” > “MAC Address Filter” > “MAC address filter whitelist” Submenu
Menu Item Explanation
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
Opens a submenu to add a new filter entry
1. Add new
You can enter 10 filters.
Displays the previous page of the list (if more than
2. Previous page
one page is filled)
Displays the next page of the list (if more than one
3. Next Page
page is filled)
(n + 3.) No (n): Opens a submenu to edit an existing filter entry
7.8.2.5.5 “MAC address filter whitelist” > “Add new / No (n)” Submenu
Table 159: “Firewall” > “MAC Address Filter” > “MAC address filter whitelist” > “Add new / No (n)”
Submenu
Menu Item Submenu Item / Explanation
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
1. MAC address Enter the MAC address.
2. MAC mask Enter the MAC mask.
Enable or disable the filter.
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
3. Filter state
1. on The filter is enabled.
2. off The filter is disabled.
To apply the changes for the selected filter entry,
4. accept
choose this menu item.
To delete the selected filter entry, choose this menu
5. delete
item.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 201
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
202 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 161: “Firewall” > “User Filter” > “Add New / No (n)” Submenu
Menu Item Submenu Item / Explanation
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
1. Source IP address Enter the source IP address.
2. Source netmask Enter the source network mask.
3. Source port Enter the source port number.
4. Destination IP address Enter the destination IP address.
5. Destination netmask Enter here the destination netmask.
6. Destination port Enter the destination port number.
Select the permitted protocols.
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
7. protocol 1. tcp The TCP protocol is permitted.
2. udp The UDP protocol is permitted.
3. tcp & udp Both protocols are permitted.
Select the permitted interfaces.
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
1. all All interfaces are permitted.
8. interface 2. VPN The VPN interface is permitted.
3. WAN The WAN interface is permitted.
4. X1 The X1 interface is permitted.
5. X2 The X2 interface is permitted.
Enable or disable the filter.
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
9. state
1. on The filter is enabled.
2. off The filter is disabled.
To apply the changes for the selected filter entry,
10. accept
choose this menu item.
To delete the selected filter entry, choose this menu
11. delete
item.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 203
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
This menu contains other submenus for the date and time settings.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
204 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 205
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
In addition to the menu item for the enabled storage medium, the current status is
displayed.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
206 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
This menu contains other submenus with functions for firmware backup and
restore, as well as information and setting options for the current system partition.
The submenu only appears if a memory card is inserted that does not contain a
bootable system. Otherwise, a message is displayed.
You are taken to the following submenu after making the selection.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 207
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
This submenu contains a setting option for the Auto Update function.
The submenu only appears if the data for the firmware backup has been
selected.
Table 168: “Package Server” > “Firmware Backup” > “Auto Update Feature” Menu
Menu Item Explanation
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
The Auto Update function is OFF for the selected
1. No
data.
The Auto Update function is ON for the selected
2. Yes
data.
You are taken to the following submenu after making the selection.
This submenu contains a selection option for the backup destination drive.
Table 169: “Package Server” > “Firmware Backup” > “Auto Update Feature” Menu
Menu Item Explanation
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
1. SD Card The selected data is copied to the memory card.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
208 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
This submenu contains a selection option for the restore source drive.
You are taken to the following submenu after making the selection.
Table 171: “Package Server” > “Firmware Restore” > “Select Package” Menu
Menu Item Explanation
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
1. PLC Runtime project The PLC runtime project is loaded.
2. Settings The controller settings are loaded.
3. System The controller operating system is loaded.
The controller operating system and settings are
4. System + Setting
loaded.
5. All All data is loaded.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 209
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
This submenu contains information and setting options for the current system
partition.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
210 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
This menu contains information on the internal flash memory and, if inserted, on
the external memory card.
In addition to the menu item, the status is displayed for the enabled partition.
This submenu contains information on the external memory card and its
formatting.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 211
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
This menu contains choices and settings for the device update.
You can select fieldbus software, program licenses and update scripts, for
example, for transfer from a PC to the controller.
You can also enable transmitted packages or delete from the controller.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
212 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
This submenu contains other submenus with settings for the respective services.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 213
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
214 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 215
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
216 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 217
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
This submenu contains the settings for the DHCPD service for the selected
interface.
Table 185: “Ports and Services” > “DHCPD” > “Xn” Submenu
Menu Item Submenu Item / Explanation
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
Enable/disable the DHCPD service for the Xn
interface.
1. State 0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
1. Enable The DHCPD service is enabled.
2. Disable The DHCPD service is disabled.
2. Range Enter a range of available IP addresses.
Specify the lease time here in seconds. 120
3. Lease Time (min)
seconds are entered by default.
Enter a new static assignment of MAC ID to IP
address,
4. Add static hostname e.g., “01:02:03:04:05:06=192.168.1.20” or
“hostname=192.168.1.20”.
You can enter 10 assignments.
This displays the static assignments.
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
(5 + n). Static Host (n) Opens a submenu to change the
1. Edit
selected assignment
2. Delete Deletes the selected assignment
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
218 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 219
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
This submenu contains the settings for the MODBUS TCP service.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
220 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
This submenu contains the settings for the MODBUS UDP service.
This submenu contains the settings for the PLC runtime system services.
Table 190: “Ports and Services” > “PLC Runtime Services” Submenu
Menu Item Explanation
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
1. General Configuration Enter the password for port authentication.
Opens a submenu with service settings for
2. CODESYS 2
CODESYS 2
Opens a submenu with service settings for
3. e!RUNTIME
e!RUNTIME
4. Change CODESYS
Opens a submenu with firewall settings for the this
Runtime firewalling
service for the interfaces
settings
5. Change CODESYS
Opens a submenu with firewall settings for the this
WebVisu firewalling
service for the interfaces
settings
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 221
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 191: “Ports and Services” > “PLC Runtime Services” > “CODESYS 2” Submenu
Menu Item Submenu Item / Explanation
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
Enable or disable the Webserver for the CODESYS
web visualization.
1. Webserver
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
enable/disable
1. Enable The Webserver is enabled.
2. Disable The Webserver is disabled.
Enable or disable the communication between the
CODESYS 2 runtime system and the CODESYS 2
2. Communication programming system.
enable/disable 0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
1. Enable Communication is enabled.
2. Disable Communication is disabled.
Enter here the port number for communication with
3. Communication Port
the CODESYS 2 programming system. The default
Number
value is 2455.
Enter here whether a login is required for connecting
to the device.
4. Port Authentication
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
enable/disable
1. Enable Authentication via login is required.
2. Disable Authentication is not required.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
222 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 192: “Ports and Services” > “PLC Runtime Services” > “e!RUNTIME” Submenu
Menu Item Submenu Item / Explanation
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
Enable or disable the Webserver for the
e!RUNTIME web visualization.
1. Webserver
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
enable/disable
1. Enable The Webserver is enabled.
2. Disable The Webserver is disabled.
Enter here whether a login is required for connecting
to the device.
2. Port Authentication
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
enable/disable
1. Enable Authentication via login is required.
2. Disable Authentication is not required.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 223
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
224 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 225
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 197: “SNMP” > “SNMP v1/v2c Trap Receiver Configuration” Submenu
Parameters Explanation
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
Opens a submenu with information on the selected
(n). Trap Receiver (n)
v1/v2c trap receiver to delete the trap receiver
Opens a series of submenus to create a new v1/v2c
trap receiver
You can enter 10 trap receivers.
The following entries/selections are possible:
(n + 1). Add new Trap • IP address of the new trap receiver
Receiver (management station)
• Community name for the new trap receiver
configuration (max. 32 characters, no spaces)
• SNMP version via which the traps are sent
(v1/v2c)
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
226 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 227
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
228 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
</dg_
You must select the correct COM port after starting “WAGO Ethernet Settings”.
In the “Communication settings” window that then opens, adapt the settings to
your needs.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 229
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Once you have configured “WAGO Ethernet Settings” and have clicked [Apply],
connection to the controller is established automatically.
If “WAGO Ethernet Settings” has already been started with the correct
parameters, you can establish connection to the controller by clicking [Read].
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
230 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Besides some fixed values — e.g., item No., MAC address and firmware version
— the currently used IP address and the configuration method are also shown
here.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 231
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Values can be changed in the “Input” column, while the parameters in use are
shown in the “Currently in use” column.
Address Source
Specify how the controller will determine its IP address: Static, via DHCP or via
BootP.
Time server
Specify the IP address for a time server if setting the controller's system time via
NTP.
Hostname
The host name of the controller is displayed here. In the controller's initial state,
this name is composed of the string “PFCx00” and the last three bytes of the
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
232 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
MAC address.
This standard value is also used whenever the chosen name in the “Input”
column is deleted.
Domain name
The current domain name is displayed here. This setting can be automatically
overwritten with dynamic configurations, e.g., DHCP.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 233
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
234 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 235
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Additional information
For a detailed description of the full range of functions, refer to the “Manual for
PLC Programming using CODESYS 2.3” manual available on the “WAGO-I/O-
PRO” (759-911) CD.
2. Open the selection box in the “Target system settings” window and select
the fieldbus controller you are using. In the example show here this is the
PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G “WAGO_750-8207”.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
236 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
3. Click on [OK]. The “Target system settings” configuration window then
opens.
4. To accept the default configuration for the fieldbus controller click [OK].
The “New component” window opens.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 237
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
5. In this “New component” window create a new program function block. In
the example shown here, the new function block “PLC_PRG” is created in
the “ST” programming language.
The PLC configuration is used to configure the fieldbus controller, along with the
connected I/O modules and to declare variables for accessing the inputs and
outputs of the I/O modules.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
238 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 239
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
3. Right-click on the entry “K-Bus[FIX]” and then select “Edit” in the contextual
menu. The “configuration” dialog window then opens.
4. There are three options for accepting the topology for the I/O modules
connected to the fieldbus controller. The simplest way is to scan in the
topology using WAGO-I/O-CHECK.
To do this, click on the “Start WAGO-I/O-CHECK and scan” button.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
240 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
5. WAGO-I/O-CHECK is started.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 241
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
8. The detected I/O modules then appear in the configuration window.
9. You can use the [Add] button to add new I/O modules to manually define
or change the configuration.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
242 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
10. You can select a module in the new “Module selection” window that then
appears.
11. You can change the position of an I/O module by marking it and then using
the arrow buttons at the right edge of the window to move it up or down.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 243
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
13. To close the I/O Configurator, click [OK].
14. The individual inputs and outputs of the selected I/O module are displayed
in the right half of the configuration window.
Here, you can declare a dedicated variable in the “Name” column for each
input and output, e.g., “Output_1”, “Output_2”, “Input_1”, “Input_2”.
15. The added I/O modules appear in the control configuration under
“K-Bus[FIX]” with their associated fixed addresses and, where applicable,
their previously set variable name.
Figure 62: Control Configuration: I/O Modules with Their Associated Addresses
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
244 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The following example illustrates the editing of the program function block. To do
this, an input is assigned to an output:
1. Press [F2] to open the Input assistant, or right click and select “Input
assistant” from the contextual menu.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 245
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
4. Repeat Step 2 for the “Input_1” variable.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
246 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Proceed as follows:
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 247
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
3. In the “Name” field enter a designation for your fieldbus controller and then
click on “Tcp/Ip (Level 2 Route)”. Then click [OK].
5. Transfer the PLC program by clicking on Online in the menu bar and select
Login.
6. Ensure that the Run/Stop switch for the fieldbus controller is set to “Run”.
7. Start the PLC program by clicking on Online > Start in the menu bar.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
248 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
If a PLC program is running in the fieldbus controller, a PLC task starts with the
reading of the fieldbus data (only with fieldbus controllers and fieldbus
connection), the integrated input and output data and the I/O modules. The
output data changed in the PLC program is updated after the PLC task is
processed. A change in operating mode (“Stop/Run”) is only carried out at the
end of a PLC task. The cycle time includes the time from the start of the PLC
program to the next start. If a larger loop is programmed within a PLC program,
the task time is prolonged accordingly. The inputs and outputs are updated
during processing. These updates only take place at the end of a PLC task.
Two examples:
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 249
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Enter the character string of the absolute address without empty spaces. The first
bit of a word has an address of 0.
Watchdog
In an application program without task configuration, there is no watchdog that
monitors the cycle time of the application program (PLC_PRG).
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
250 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
3. To assign a new name to the task (e.g. PLC_Prog), click on “New Task”.
Then select the type of task. In this example, this is the “cyclic” type.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 251
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
4. Add the program module PLC_PRG that you have just created (see
Section “Editing the Program Modules”). To do this, right-clock on the
“Clock” symbol and in the contextual menu select “Attach program call-up”.
Then, click the [...] button and [OK].
5. Compile the example program by selecting Project > Rebuild all in the
context menu.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
252 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Priority 0 … 5:
Important arithmetic operations and synchronized access to I/O module process
images are to be carried out as tasks with the highest priorities 0 … 5. These
tasks are processed fully according to priority and correspond to Linux® RT
priorities
-79 through -74.
Priority 6 … 20:
Real-time access, such as access to ETHERNET and the file system, to fieldbus
data and to the RS-232 interface (when available) are to be carried out as tasks
with average priorities 6 … 20. These tasks are processed fully according to
priority and correspond to Linux® RT priorities -40 through -26.
Priority 21 … 31:
Applications such as long-lasting arithmetic operations and non-real-time-
relevant access to ETHERNET and the file system, to fieldbus data and the RS-
232 interface (when provided) are to be carried out as tasks with the lowest
priorities 21 … 31. No prioritiy distinction is made between tasks of priorities 21
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 253
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
… 31. These tasks all receive the same computing time from the operating
system (“Completely Fair Scheduler” procedure).
Provided that a task is not located on a breakpoint, RUN and STOP from the user
interface (IDE) and from the mode selector switch (BAS) always have an effect
on all tasks (case 1 and case 2).
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
254 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 255
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
If the mode selector switch and the STOP function of the user interface are used
simultaneously, the mode selector switch has priority (case 3 and case 4).
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
256 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
As soon as a task is located at a breakpoint, only all other tasks can be controlled
with the mode selector switch.
Exception: If the mode selector switch is on STOP, the debug task is also no
longer processed.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 257
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
If a task is at a breakpoint and the connection to the IDE is broken (e.g., by
logging out), all breakpoints are deleted.
The debug task stays at the current position until the next time the mode selector
switch is switched from STOP to RUN. In this case, the task continues to run
from the current position (case 7).
To activate events and define a program to be called up, open the window “Task
configuration” in the “Resources” tab in the CODESYS development
environment.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
258 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 259
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The following events can be activated:
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
260 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
A new function having the defined name then appears in the “Function blocks”
tab.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 261
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Handling for the event that has occurred is now programmed in this new function.
The newly created project is now supported and can be loaded to the controller.
After startup, the value of the “Events” variable changes only when counter “i”
reaches the value 0, meaning that division by 0 has been performed.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
262 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Figure 87: CODESYS – Variable Contents After Division by “0” and Call-up of the Event Handler
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 263
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
PFC variables, the bit memory address area and the slaves attached to the
fieldbus.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
264 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The size and structure of the process image for the I/O modules connected to the
system are described in the appendix.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 265
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
No direct access from fieldbus to the process image for I/O modules!
Any data that is required from the I/O module process image must be explicitly
mapped in the CODESYS program to the data in the fieldbus process image and
vice versa! Direct access is not possible!
Table 202: Access to the Process Images of the Input and Output Data – Local Bus
Memory Area Description Access Logical Address Space
via PLC
Local bus input Map of the local input modules Read Word %IW0 to %IW999
*
process image (I/O module 1 to 64 ) in the RAM
Byte %IB0 to %IB1999
Local bus output Map of the local output modules Read/ Word %QW0 to %QW999
*
process image (I/O module 1 to 64 ) in the RAM Write
Byte %QB0 to %QB1999
* The use of up to 250 I/O modules is possible with the WAGO local bus extension modules.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
266 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 203: Access to the Process Images of the Input and Output Data – MODBUS
Memory area Description Access via Logical Address Space
PLC
MODBUS input MODBUS input variables, Read Word
process image addressed by word via MODBUS %IW1000 to %IW1999
Byte
%IB2000 to %IB3999
Read Bit
MODBUS input variables,
%IX1000.0 …%IX1000.15 to
addressed by bit via MODBUS
%IX1384.0 … %IX1384.15
MODBUS output MODBUS output variables, Read/ Word
process image addressed by word via MODBUS Write %QW1000 to %QW1999
Byte
%QB2000 to %QB3999
MODBUS output variables, Read/ Bit
addressed by bit via MODBUS Write %QX1000.0 …
%QX1000.15 to %QX1384.0
… %QX1384.15
Table 204: Access to the Process Images of the Input and Output Data – CANopen
Memory area Description Access via Logical Address Space
PLC
CANopen input CANopen master or CANopen Read Word
process image slave input variables %IW3000 to %IW4999
Byte
%IB6000 to %IB9999
CANopen output CANopen master or CANopen Read/ Word
process image slave output variables Write %QW3000 to %QW4999
Byte
%QB6000 to %QB9999
Table 205: Access to the Process Images of the Input and Output Data – PROFIBUS
Memory area Description Access via Logical Address Space
PLC
PROFIBUS input PROFIBUS input variables Read Word
process image %IW2000 to %IW2499
Byte
%IB4000 to %IB4999
PROFIBUS PROFIBUS output variables Read/ Word
output process Write %QW2000 to %QW2499
image Byte
%QB4000 to %QB4999
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 267
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 206: Access to the Process Images of the Input and Output Data – Flags
Memory Area Description Access via Logical Address Space
PLC
Flag variables Total of 128 kB remanent Read/ %MW0 to
memory (65536 words). Write %MW65535
104 kB addressed by word via Read/ Word (MODBUS)
MODBUS (53248 words) Write %MW0 to %MW3327
6.5 kB addressed by bit via Read/ Bit (MODBUS)
MODBUS (3328 words). Write %MX0.0 … %MX0.15 to
%MX3327.0 …
%MX3327.15
Retain variables Retain memory addressed by Read/ -
symbols in the NVRAM: 128 kB Write
* The use of up to 250 I/O modules is possible with the WAGO local bus extension modules.
The total size of the memory for flag and retain variables is 128 kB (131060
bytes). The size of these two sections can be customized as required, provided
the total (permissible) size is not exceeded.
If you are using bit-oriented addressing, remember that the basic address is
word-based. The bits are addressed from 0 to 15.
Table 207: Arrangement of the I/O Modules for the Addressing Example
Fieldbus controller 750- 750- 750- 750- 750- 750- 750- 750-
400 554 402 504 454 650 468 600
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 %QX4.0 4DO, 24 V:
750-504 1. Digital output module with a data width of 4
2 %QX4.1 bits. As the analog output module already
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
268 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 208: Addressing Example
I/O module Input data Output data Description
Type C*
In this section, CODESYS task denotes only tasks within CODESYS that contain
an access to the local bus. Tasks that do not access the local bus are not
synchronized in the same way as described below. For this, see section
“Creating Tasks.”
8.9.1 Case 1: CODESYS Task Interval Set Smaller than the Local
Bus Cycle
Execution of the CODESYS tasks is synchronized with the local bus cycle time.
The CODESYS task is processed in parallel to the local bus cycle. The
CODESYS task interval is extended to the local bus cycle time. This is necessary
so that each CODESYS task is started with new input data from the local bus and
the output values are also set at the module after each CODESYS task.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 269
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Example:
CODESYS task interval (CTI): 100 µs
Local bus cycle (LBZ): 2000 µs
Result: Matching of the CODESYS task interval to the local bus cycle of 2000
µs.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
270 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
At the end of the CODESYS task, the local bus cycle starts, which is processed
synchronously with the fastest CODESYS task. This ensures that when starting
each CODESYS Task, current input data are available from the local bus and the
output values of each CODESYS task are also output to the I/O modules.
Example:
CODESYS task interval (CTI): 2500 µs
Local bus cycle (LBZ): 2000 µs
Result: Execution of the local bus cycle every 2500 µs.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 271
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Prior to processing the CODESYS task, the local bus cycle is executed, which
provides the current input data for the CODESYS task. After execution of the
CODESYS task, an additional local bus cycle is started, which provides the
output data to the I/O modules.
This ensures that at the start of every CODESYS task, current input data are
available from the local bus and the output data from each CODESYS task are
quickly output to the I/O modules. This prevents processing of local bus cycles
that would unnecessarily use a great deal of computing time on the CPU.
Example:
CODESYS task interval (CTI): 5000 µs
Local bus cycle (LBZ): 2000 µs
Result: Execution of the local bus cycle 2000 µs prior to the CODESYS task and
once directly after the CODESYS task.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
272 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The I/O data from the local bus are refreshed once before the CODESYS task
and once after the CODESYS task and an additional local bus cycle is also
executed every 10 ms.
Example:
CODESYS task interval (CTI): 150000 µs
Local bus cycle (LBZ): 2000 µs
Result: Execution of the local bus cycle 2000 µs prior to the CODESYS task,
once directly after the CODESYS task and 10 ms after the previous local bus
cycle.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 273
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
274 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 209: Local Bus (KBus) Settings
Parameter Explanation
The update mode is used to configure how the local bus process
data is to be updated (refreshed).
In the asynchronous update mode process data
Asynchronous
Update mode are refreshed in cycles at a definable interval.
In the synchronous update mode the process
Synchronous* data are synchronized with the most rapid
CODESYS task that accesses the local bus.
The update interval for the local bus is set by the cycle time. This
setting is effective only in the asynchronous mode.
KBus cycle
1000 µs Minimum value 1 millisecond
time *
10000 µs Default value 10 milliseconds
50000 µs Maximum value 50 milliseconds
This value indicates the priority for the local bus thread. This
setting is effective only in the asynchronous mode.
KBus thread This priority is equivalent to the priority of the cyclic CODESYS
priority tasks (see section “Cyclic Tasks”).
0* Highest priority
15 Lowest priority
PLC stop Specifies the response of the local bus outputs when the PLC
behavior application stops.
Hold last value The output states are retained.
Set to zero* Outputs are set to zero.
*
Default setting
In the synchronous update mode the runtime behavior of CODESYS tasks can
be influenced by the local bus. The minimum task interval that can then be
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 275
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
achieved depends on the duration of a local bus cycle. The duration of a local
bus cycle, on the other hand, is based on the I/O modules connected to the bus.
As a rule of thumb: The shorter the local bus structure, the shorter the cycle time
and digital modules are faster than analog or complex ones.
In the event of a local bus error, the CODESYS tasks are blocked until the error
is rectified, i.e., when a local bus cycle has been successfully executed again.
No call-up of local bus status when local bus errors are present!
If a local bus error has occurred, it is not possible to call up the bus status using
KBUS_ERROR_INFORMATION (mod_com.lib) while in the synchronous update
mode.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
276 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 277
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
This set value has already been requested in the system after a successful
program download and can be fully utilized.
Together with the data memory to be used by the application, memory is required
for the individual program function blocks in the system.
The size of the administration space is calculated from the function block
limitation * 12 (i.e., normally 4096 * 12).
The actual size of the main memory required in the system for data is the sum of
global data memory and function block limitation memory.
This value should not exceed the value specified for “Size of entire data
memory.”
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
278 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The remanent section is subdivided into the flag area (memory) and the retain
area.
The breakdown of the flag and retain variables can be customized as required.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 279
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The “Update unused I/Os” box can be checked for initial startup. Enabling this
results in a higher CPU load and possibly a significant effect on task processing.
</dg_
You create all visualization types (HMI and Web visualization) with the same
CODESYS graphic editor. Select the visualization type in the “Target system
settings” window. A description file in XML format is generated from the
information for each of these pages. You can find these files in the subfolder
“visu” of the CODESYS installation path. The HTML home page “webvisu.htm”
and the Java archive “webvisu.jar” in the applet (webvisu.class) are also saved
there in a compressed format.
Once you have selected a visualization type, the following steps must be
performed to execute the technique:
1. Click the “Resources” tab and open the “Target system settings.” Specify
whether you wish to have visualization displayed as a “Web visualization”
using an Internet browser.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
280 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Figure 100: Selecting the Visualization Technique in the Target System Settings
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 281
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
2. Generate a start page for the visualization. Right-click the “Visualization”
folder in the “Visualization” tab. Select Add object ... from the contextual
menu. The “New visualization” dialog box opens.
3. In the “New visualization” dialog window, enter the name PLC_VISU for the
start visualization. This page is then displayed as the start page upon
system startup.
4. Activate the CODESYS Web server in the WBM on the “Ports and Services
– CODESYS Services” page in the “CODESYS Webserver” group.
5. Activate the http service in the WBM on the “Ports and Services – Network
Services” page in the “HTTP” group.
If you transfer the PLC program to the controller (Online > Login) and start the
program (Online > Start), enter one of the following lines in the address line of
the Web browser for online visualization:
You can also have Web visualization displayed via the WBM (see Section
“`CODESYS - WebVisu´” Page).
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
282 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The overall size of the PLC program, visualization files, bitmaps, log files,
configuration files, etc. must fit into the file system.
Web visualization uses its own protocol for exchanging process data between
applet and control.
The controller transfers process data with ASCII coding. The pipe symbol (“|”) is
used to separate two process values. Therefore, the space requirement for a
process data variable in the process data memory is dependent not only on the
data type, but also on the process value itself. Thus, a variable of the “WORD”
type occupies between one byte for the values 0 through 9 and five bytes for
values from 10000 and greater. The selected format (ASCII + |) only permits a
rough estimate of the space requirement for the individual process data in the
process data buffer. If the size of the ASCII coded process data is exceeded,
Web visualization no longer works as expected.
The controller is based on a real-time operating system. This means that high-
priority processes (e.g., PLC program) interrupt or block lower priority processes.
The Web server responsible for Web visualization is among these lower priority
processes.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 283
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Processor Time
Make sure when configuring tasks, that there is sufficient processor time
available for all processes.
Network Load
The controller's CPU processes both the PLC program and network traffic.
ETHERNET communication demands that each received telegram is processed,
regardless of whether it is intended for the controller or not.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
284 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 285
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
In order to optimize the Web visualization for display on a device with a fixed
resolution, proceed as follows:
In the “Target system settings”, enter the pixel width and height in the tab
“Visualization”. When the visualization is created, the visible area is highlighted in
gray. However, the actual pixel width and height of the Web visualization is
defined by the attributes “Height” and “Width” of the HTML APPLET tag in the
“webvisu.htm” file. Do not forget to also adapt these parameters to the existing
resolution.
This depends on the situation. After a standard installation, the cache is enabled.
If the cache is enabled, the JRE uses it to store applets and Java archives. If the
Web visualization is called up a second time, it requires considerably less time to
start because the applet (approx. 250 kb) does not need to be reloaded via the
network, but is already available in the cache. This is especially useful when
network connections are slow.
Note:
The Java archives may not be completely transferred into the cache due to
network failures. In this case, the cache must be cleared manually or disabled.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
286 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Why does the visualization element “TREND” in the Web visualization only
work “Online”?
The following settings must be selected for visualization projects: Resources tab
> Target system settings.
Activate “Web visualization” and “Trend data recording within control”. Otherwise,
the trend data is stored on the hard drive of the CODESYS development PC.
This makes a permanent connection between the controller and the CODESYS
gateway necessary. If this connection is interrupted, this may lead to the
controller behaving unpredictably.
In the TREND configuration dialog, you can choose between “Online” and
“History” operating modes. The controller only supports the “Online” operating
mode for visualization projects since it is not possible to configure the maximum
size (quota) of the trend files (*.trd). Uncontrolled expansion of trend files can
lead to unpredictable controller behavior.
In most cases, the use of the “HISTOGRAM” visualization element is the better
choice, as this gives full control over the time and number of measurements and
thus the amount of memory required.
The status of this component is best described as “Add-On”, i.e., an extra that is
free of charge and not warrantied.
The following settings must be selected for visualization projects: Resources tab
> Target system settings.
Activate “Web visualization” (checkmark) and “Alarm handling within control”.
Otherwise, the alarm data is processed on the CODESYS development PC. This
makes a permanent connection between the controller and the CODESYS
gateway necessary. If this connection is interrupted, this may lead to the
controller behaving unpredictably.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 e!RUNTIME Runtime Environment 287
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Additional Information
Information on the installation and startup of e!COCKPIT is provided in the
corresponding manual.
Information on programming is provided in the CODESYS 3 documentation.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
288 e!RUNTIME Runtime Environment WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 e!RUNTIME Runtime Environment 289
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The size of the administration space is calculated from the function block
limitation * 12 (i.e., 4096 * 12).
The actual size of the main memory required in the system for data is the sum of
global program and data memory and function block limitation memory.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
290 MODBUS – CODESYS 2 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
10 MODBUS – CODESYS 2
</dg_
10.1 General
MODBUS is a non-vendor-specific, open fieldbus standard for a wide range of
applications in production and process automation. The MODBUS
communications protocol is based on a master/slave or client/server architecture
that uses function codes for execution of individual MODBUS services, which
have reading or writing access to individual or multiple elements of the MODBUS
data model simultaneously.
10.2 Features
The MODBUS slave implemented in the PFC200 has the following features:
• 3 modes: MODBUS TCP, MODBUS UDP and MODBUS RTU, which can
be run independently of one another simultaneously
• Data exchange via 1000 registers in each of the local MODBUS process
images
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 MODBUS – CODESYS 2 291
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
10.3 Configuration
All of the MODBUS operating modes are configured using the CODESYS PLC
configuration.
• MODBUS settings,
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
292 MODBUS – CODESYS 2 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 MODBUS – CODESYS 2 293
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
294 MODBUS – CODESYS 2 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 215: MODBUS RTU Settings
Parameters Explanation
RTU mode Enable for the MODBUS RTU mode
Off* Operation not permitted
Active Operation possible
Device ID Device ID (device address) for the tty device
1* min. device ID
247 max. device ID
Maximum Response timeout for a request in [ms]
response time 2000 min. response time = 2 seconds. If this value is
set lower than 2 seconds, it will be corrected
internally to 2 seconds.
*
5000 Default = 5 seconds
4294967295 max. response time > 71 hours.
Interface Device name
“dev/…” Name of the tty in the string
*
“dev/ttyO0” Standard tty
Baud rate Communication baud rate
1200 baud 1200 baud min. transmission speed
2400 baud 2400 baud
4800 baud 4800 baud
9600 baud 9600 baud
19200 baud 19200 baud
38400 baud 38400 baud
57600 baud 57600 baud
*
115200 baud 115200 baud, max. transmission speed
Stop bits Number of stop bits
1 stop bit* 1 stop bit in the frame; must be used when even
or odd parity has been selected.
2 stop bits 2 stop bits in the frame; must be used when
“None” has been selected for parity.
Parity Parity check
None No parity check performed; 2 stop bits must be
selected in the configuration for this setting.
*
Even Even parity
Odd Odd parity
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 MODBUS – CODESYS 2 295
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 215: MODBUS RTU Settings
Parameters Explanation
Flow control Data flow control (Supported only for the setting “RS-232” for the
physical interface.)
None* No data flow control
RTS/CTS Hardware flow control
Physical Mode for the physical interface
interface RS-232* RS-232 is used as the physical interface.
RS-485 RS-485 is used as the physical interface.
*
Default setting
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
296 MODBUS – CODESYS 2 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
</dg_
• MODBUS flag area – is an area, in which both MODBUS Read and Write
services can be executed.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 MODBUS – CODESYS 2 297
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
As no direct access to the I/O modules is provided by the fieldbus, data can be
exchanged via this interface between the PLC and MODBUS for processing in
the control system (PLC). Using this data in the individual I/O modules connected
to the PLC can then be performed by the application.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
298 MODBUS – CODESYS 2 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The figure shows the maximum addressable flag area with a size of 104 kB.
The actual addressable flag area depends on the current memory arrangement in
the target system settings in CODESYS.
The default setting is 24 kB.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 MODBUS – CODESYS 2 299
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The MODBUS address area reserved for these registers ranging from the
MODBUS starting address of 4096 (0x1000) up to the MODBUS end address of
12287 (0x2FFF), without any allocation to the IEC 61131 address area. These
registers can be queried using the register read services FC3, FC4 and FC23
and with the register write services FC6, FC16 and FC23. A detailed description
of the individual registers is given in the section “WAGO MODBUS Registers”.
The table below outlines the mapping for the MODBUS-reading, bit-oriented
services:
Table 216: MODBUS Mapping for Read Bit Services FC1, FC2
MODBUS Address IEC 61131 Description
(hexadecimal values Address
in parentheses)
0 … 6143 %IX1000.0 … MODBUS Output:
(0x0000 … 0x17FF) %IX1383.15 6144 PFC input bit variables in the first
384 registers/words (768 bytes) of the
2kB MODBUS output process image in
the PII.
Note: In this area, the read bit services
return the content from the bit-addressed
PII.
6144 … 12287 %QX1000.0 … MODBUS Input:
(0x1800 … 0x2FFF) %QX1383.15 6144 PFC output bit variables in the first
384 registers/words (768 bytes) of the 2
kB MODBUS-input process image in the
PIO.
12288 … 65535 %MX0.0 … Maximum bit-addressable flag area:
(0x3000 … 0xFFFF) %MX3327.15 53248 bit flags (6.5 kB);
the actual addressable flag area
depends on the current memory
arrangement in CODESYS.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
300 MODBUS – CODESYS 2 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The table below outlines the mapping for the MODBUS-writing, bit-oriented
services:
Table 217: MODBUS Mapping for Write Bit Services FC5, FC15
MODBUS Address IEC 61131 Description
(hexadecimal values Address
in parentheses)
0 … 6143 %IX1000.0 … MODBUS Output:
(0x0000 … 0x17FF) %IX1383.15 6144 PFC input bit variables in the first
384 registers/words (768 bytes) of the
2kB MODBUS output process image in
the PII.
6144 … 12287 %QX1000.0 … MODBUS Output:
(0x1800 … 0x2FFF) %QX1383.15 MODBUS-only area for bit-oriented write
access.
Bit-based write services for this area are
acknowledged by the MODBUS slave
with the MODBUS exception code
“ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS” (0x02).
12288 … 65535 %MX0.0 … Maximum bit-addressable flag area:
(0x3000 … 0xFFFF) %MX3327.15 53248 bit flags (6.5 kB);
the actual addressable flag area
depends on the current memory
arrangement in CODESYS.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 MODBUS – CODESYS 2 301
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
10.4.4.3 MODBUS Mapping for Read Register Services FC3, FC4, FC23
The table below outlines the mapping for the MODBUS-reading, register-oriented
services:
Table 218: MODBUS Mapping for Read Register Services FC3, FC4, FC23
MODBUS Address IEC 61131 Description
(hexadecimal values Address
in parentheses)
0 … 999 %IW1000 … MODBUS Output:
(0x0000 … 0x03E7) %IW1999 1000 PFC input registers/words in the
2 kB MODBUS output process image in
the PII.
Note: In this area, the read register
services return the content from the PII.
1000 … 1999 %QW1000 … MODBUS Input:
(0x03E8 … 0x07CF) %QW1999 1000 PFC output registers/words in the
2 kB MODBUS input process image in
the PIO.
Note on FC23:
Only the Read portion of this service can
be executed.
2000 … 4095 Inhibited to MODBUS-only area for
(0x07D0 … 0x0FFF) register-oriented read access. Register-
based read services for this area are
acknowledged by the MODBUS slave
with the MODBUS exception code
“ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS” (0x02).
4096 … 12287 No IEC 61131 Information and configuration registers:
(0x1000 … 0x2FFF) address Not all MODBUS addresses in this range
are valid.
Valid MODBUS addresses are described
in the Section “WAGO MODBUS
Registers”.
Access to invalid addresses are
acknowledged by the MODBUS slave
with the MODBUS exception code
“ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS” (0x02).
Note on FC23:
The Write portion of this service can only
be executed for registers that data can
be written to.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
302 MODBUS – CODESYS 2 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 218: MODBUS Mapping for Read Register Services FC3, FC4, FC23
MODBUS Address IEC 61131 Description
(hexadecimal values Address
in parentheses)
12288 … 65535 %MW0 … Maximum addressable flag area:
(0x3000 … 0xFFFF) %MW53247 53248 register/word flags (104 kB);
the actual addressable flag area
depends on the current memory
arrangement in CODESYS.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 MODBUS – CODESYS 2 303
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
10.4.4.4 MODBUS Mapping for Write Register Services FC6, FC16, FC22, FC23
• FC22 – Mask Write Register, not for information and configuration registers
Table 219: MODBUS Mapping for Write Register Services FC6, FC16, FC22, FC23
MODBUS Address IEC 61131 Description
(hexadecimal values Address
in parentheses)
0 … 999 %IW1000 … MODBUS Output:
(0x0000 … 0x03E7) %IW1999 1000 PFC input registers/words in the
2 kB MODBUS output process image in
the PII.
1000 … 1999 No access to: MODBUS Output:
(0x03E8 … 0x07CF) %QW1000 … Inhibited MODBUS area for register-
%QW1999 oriented write access.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
304 MODBUS – CODESYS 2 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 219: MODBUS Mapping for Write Register Services FC6, FC16, FC22, FC23
MODBUS Address IEC 61131 Description
(hexadecimal values Address
in parentheses)
12288 … 65535 %MW0 … Maximum addressable flag area:
(0x3000 … 0xFFFF) %MW53247 53248 register/word flags (104 kB);
the actual addressable flag area
depends on the current memory
arrangement in CODESYS.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 MODBUS – CODESYS 2 305
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
306 MODBUS – CODESYS 2 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 220: WAGO MODBUS Registers
MODBUS Address Data Length
Access Description
Dec. Hex. in Words
8197 0x2005 1 ro 0x7FFF (constant)
8198 0x2006 1 ro 0x8000 (constant)
8199 0x2007 1 ro 0x3FFF (constant)
8200 0x2008 1 ro 0x4000 (constant)
The WAGO MODBUS registers are described in more details in the following
sections.
This register contains the number of registers available in the MODBUS input
process image (MODBUS input).
This register contains the number of registers available in the MODBUS output
process image (MODBUS output).
This register contains the number of bits available in the MODBUS input process
image (MODBUS input).
This register contains the number of bits available in the MODBUS output
process image (MODBUS output).
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 MODBUS – CODESYS 2 307
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
1 = BootP
2 = DHCP
4 = Fixed IP address
This register contains the timeout value for the TCP sockets.
This value is given in units of 100ms (ticks). A new value is accepted only for new
connections which have not yet been established. In the event of any changes,
the already established connections will continue to operate using the previously
set timeout value.
This register provides the MAC address for the first ETHERNET interface (eth0).
MAC may also provide a partial result.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
308 MODBUS – CODESYS 2 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
If no trigger occurs during the watchdog within the timeout time set in the 0x1102
register (Watchdog Timeout), the “Watchdog Timeout” response is initiated. The
closing of all MODBUS TCP connections can be configured as a response, see
register 0x1103 (Watchdog Config).
The following diagrams show the possible states of the MODBUS watchdog and
status transitions for the particular operation mode.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 MODBUS – CODESYS 2 309
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The following diagram shows the possible state transitions when operation
modes are switched.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
310 MODBUS – CODESYS 2 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
This register receives commands for the MODBUS watchdog. It cannot be read,
i.e. it is not possible to read out the last command written.
The following commands are accepted depending on watchdog status:
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 MODBUS – CODESYS 2 311
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 221: Watchdog Commands
Value Name Explanation
0x5555 WATCHDOG_ Starts the configured watchdog;
START in the WATCHDOG_UNCONFIGURED state if
no timeout is configured, the response is an
ILLEGAL_DATA_VALUE (0x03) exception. In
the WATCHDOG_EXPIRED state and the
STANDARD_WATCHDOG operation mode the
response is an ILLEGAL_FUNCTION (0x01)
exception. The watchdog must in this case be
reset first with the command
WATCHDOG_RESET to the
WATCHDOG_STOPPED state. In all other
cases the watchdog is restarted and the
WATCHDOG_RUNNING state is set.
0x55AA WATCHDOG_ Stops the running watchdog;
STOP in the WATCHDOG_UNCONFIGURED state,
the response is an ILLEGAL_DATA_
VALUE (0x03) exception if no timeout time is
set. In the WATCHDOG_EXPIRED state and
the STANDARD_WATCHDOG operation mode
the response is an ILLEGAL_FUNCTION (0x01)
exception. In this case the watchdog must first
be reset with the WATCHDOG_
RESET command to the WATCHDOG_
STOPPED state. In operation mode
ALTERNATIVE_WATCHDOG the response is
an ILLEGAL_DATA_
VALUE (0x03) exception. The command is not
generally permitted in this operation mode. In all
other cases, the watchdog is stopped
successfully and the WATCHDOG_
STOPPED state is set. In the
WATCHDOG_STOPPED state, a stop
command received several times in a row does
not have any impact on the behavior of the
watchdog and is therefore not acknowledged
with an error response.
0xAAAA WATCHDOG_ Resets the expired watchdog;
RESET the watchdog is reset in the
WATCHDOG_EXPIRED state and
STANDARD_WATCHDOG operation mode.
The watchdog is then in the
WATCHDOG_STOPPED state. In all other
cases the response is an ILLEGAL_
DATA_VALUE (0x03) exception.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
312 MODBUS – CODESYS 2 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
This register contains the value for the watchdog timeout. The step width is
100 ms and the maximum value is 65535 (corresponds to 6553.5 s). The default
value is 0. In this case the watchdog cannot be started and will have the
WATCHDOG_UNCONFIGURED state.
This register contains the configuration parameters for the watchdog. The
register is organized in bits, see following table.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 MODBUS – CODESYS 2 313
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The register can be read and written in the states
WATCHDOG_UNCONFIGURED, WATCHDOG_STOPPED and
WATCHDOG_EXPIRED. However, if the watchdog is active
(WATCHDOG_RUNNING state), this register can only be read. The response to
a write operation is an ILLEGAL_FUNCTION (0x01) exception.
The individual options are activated when the specific bit, or bit combination, is
set.
The register can be both read and written irrespective of the watchdog status.
The following operation modes are possible:
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
314 MODBUS – CODESYS 2 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 224: Watchdog Operation Modes
Value Name Explanation
0x0000 STANDARD_ “Standard Watchdog” operation mode;
WATCHDOG the watchdog must be controlled explicitly via
commands (see register 0x1100 Watchdog
Command).
0x0001 ALTERNATIVE_ “Alternative Watchdog” operation mode;
WATCHDOG the watchdog is activated immediately with a
timeout > 0 s in register 0x1102 (Watchdog
Timeout). Each trigger restarts both the running
as well as the expired watchdog. In this
operation mode the registers 0x1102
(Watchdog Timeout) and 0x1103 (Watchdog
Config) are also saved retentively with the
operation mode itself. After a device restart, the
“Alternative Watchdog” operation mode is
retained with the same configuration as before
and is therefore immediately active again when
the timeout is set.
This register provides the consecutive revision index (firmware index) for the
controller.
This register provides the designation (ID) for the WAGO series (Series Code) for
the controller.
This register provides the device ID (WAGO Item No.) of the controller.
Example: 8206.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 MODBUS – CODESYS 2 315
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
This register provides the major part for the firmware version.
This register provides the minor part for the firmware version.
This register provides the version of the MODBUS slave library. The high byte
contains the major version number and the low byte, the minor version number.
Example:
0x010A => Major version number = 1, Minor version number = 10.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
316 MODBUS – CODESYS 2 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
10.6 Diagnostics
10.6.1 Diagnostics for the MODBUS Master
The status of the PLC, or of the control system, can be queried by the MODBUS
master by reading the WAGO-specific register 0x1040 – “PLC Status” using
MODBUS services FC3 (Read Holding Registers) or FC4 (Read Input Registers).
The WAGO-specific register 0x1040 – “PLC Status” is explained in the Section
“PLC Status Registers”.
The status of the MODBUS Watchdog can be requested using a register service
(FC3 or FC4) with a query to the WAGO-specific register 0x1101 – “Watchdog
Status Register”. Information about this is given in the Section “MODBUS
Watchdog”.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 MODBUS – CODESYS 2 317
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 225: Diagnostics for the Error Server
Diagnostics Diagnostic text Method of Explanation
ID saving
0x00090006 Modbus Slave Permanent Starting the MODBUS slave in
UDP start failed UDP mode failed.
0x00090007 Modbus Slave Temporary MODBUS slave UDP mode
UDP terminated successfully terminated.
0x00090008 Modbus Slave Temporary MODBUS slave successfully
RTU started started in the RTU mode.
0x00090009 Modbus Slave Permanent Starting the MODBUS slave in
RTU start failed RTU mode failed.
0x0009000A Modbus Slave Temporary MODBUS slave RTU mode
RTU terminated successfully terminated.
0x0009000B Modbus Slave Temporary MODBUS slave data
data exchange exchange started.
started by PLC
0x0009000C Modbus Slave Temporary MODBUS slave data
data exchange exchange stopped.
stopped by PLC
0x0009000F Modbus Slave Permanent Monitoring time for controller
PLC watchdog (PLC) expired.
timer expired
0x00090100 Modbus Slave Permanent MODBUS slave configuration
common failed.
configuration
failed.
0x00090101 Modbus Slave Temporary MODBUS slave TCP
TCP configured configuration completed
successfully. successfully.
0x00090102 Modbus Slave Permanent MODBUS slave TCP
TCP configuration configuration failed.
failed.
0x00090103 Modbus Slave Temporary MODBUS slave UDP
UDP configured configuration completed
successfully successfully.
0x00090104 Modbus Slave Permanent MODBUS slave UDP
UDP configuration configuration failed.
failed.
0x00090105 Modbus Slave Temporary MODBUS slave RTU
RTU configured configuration completed
successfully. successfully.
0x00090106 Modbus Slave Permanent MODBUS slave RTU
RTU configuration configuration failed.
failed
0x00090107 Port for Modbus Permanent Serial port for MODBUS slave
Slave RTU RTU configuration already
operation not free. occupied.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
318 MODBUS – CODESYS 2 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 225: Diagnostics for the Error Server
Diagnostics Diagnostic text Method of Explanation
ID saving
0x00090108 Modbus Slave Permanent MODBUS slave RTU
RTU configuration configuration for the RS-485
in RS-485 mode mode has failed.
failed.
0x00090200 Modbus Slave Temporary MODBUS watchdog activated.
Watchdog
activated.
0x00090201 Modbus Slave Temporary MODBUS watchdog
Watchdog deactivated.
deactivated.
0x00090202 Modbus Slave Permanent MODBUS watchdog
Watchdog Timer monitoring time expired.
expired.
0x00090203 Modbus Slave has Permanent All MODBUS TCP
terminated all connections terminated due to
established TCP timeout.
connections.
0x00090300 Modbus Slave: Permanent Request for system resources
obtaining system by the MODBUS slave has
resource failed failed.
0x00090301 Modbus Slave: Permanent Access to system resources
processing system by the MODBUS slave has
resource failed. failed.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 MODBUS – e!RUNTIME 319
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
11 MODBUS – e!RUNTIME
11.1 MODBUS Address Overview
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
320 MODBUS – e!RUNTIME WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 MODBUS – e!RUNTIME 321
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 226: WAGO MODBUS Registers
MODBUS Address Data Length
Access Description
Dec. Hex. in Words
Number of output registers,
64,069 0xFA45 1 ro
digital 0x8000
Constants Registers
64,160 0xFAA0 1 ro Constant 0x1234
64,161 0xFAA1 1 ro Constant 0xAAAA
64,162 0xFAA2 1 ro Constant 0x5555
64,250 0xFAFA 1 ro Live register
The WAGO MODBUS registers are described in more details in the following
sections.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
322 MODBUS – e!RUNTIME WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The following diagrams show the possible states of the MODBUS watchdog and
status transitions for the particular operation mode.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 MODBUS – e!RUNTIME 323
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The state diagram for the SIMPLE_WATCHDOG operation mode shows that the
watchdog is always active as soon as a timeout > 0 is set in the register 0xFA01
(Watchdog Timeout). The writing of commands in the register 0xFA00 (Watchdog
Command) is restricted in this operation mode. Only the WATCHDOG_START
command is permitted as a possible trigger. The only possibility to deactivate and
stop the watchdog in operation mode SIMPLE_WATCHDOG, is the switching
back to the operation mode ADVANCED_WATCHDOG.
The following diagram shows the possible state transitions when operation
modes are switched.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
324 MODBUS – e!RUNTIME WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
This register receives commands for the MODBUS watchdog. It cannot be read,
i.e. it is not possible to read out the last command written.
The following commands are accepted depending on watchdog status:
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 MODBUS – e!RUNTIME 325
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
This register contains the value for the watchdog timeout. The step width is 1 ms
and the maximum value is 65535 (corresponds to 65.535 s). The default value is
0. In this case the watchdog cannot be started and will have the
WATCHDOG_UNCONFIGURED state.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
326 MODBUS – e!RUNTIME WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
This register contains the configuration parameters for the watchdog. The
register is organized in bits, see following table.
The register can be read and written irrespective of the watchdog state in the
SIMPLE_WATCHDOG operation mode.
However, in the ADVANCED_WATCHDOG operation mode, the register can only
be read and written in the WATCHDOG_UNCONFIGURED and
WATCHDOG_STOPPED states.
If the watchdog is active (WATCHDOG_RUNNING or WATCHDOG_EXPIRED
state), only a read access is permissible. The response to a write request in this
case is an ILLEGAL_FUNCTION (0x01) exception.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 MODBUS – e!RUNTIME 327
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 229: Watchdog Configuration
Bit Name/Bit Identifier Explanation
*Default setting
The individual options are activated if the relevant bit or bit combination is set.
The 0xFA04 register contains the time for the MODBUS TCP connection
watchdog. Time base is 10 ms. This enables the time to be set up to 655350 ms.
If the register contains a value > 0 s when a new TCP connection from a
MODBUS master is accepted, the watchdog for this connection is started. Later
changes to the register have no effect on the monitoring of existing connections.
If the watchdog is started and no telegram is received from the connected
MODBUS master within the set time, this connection is closed from one side with
a reset.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
328 MODBUS – e!RUNTIME WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The registers 0xFA10–0xFA13 contain the WAGO order number of the controller.
Example: 0750-8202/0025-0001.
0xFA10 = 0750,
0xFA11 = 8202,
0xFA12 = 0025,
0xFA13 = 0001
The register 0xFA16 contains the firmware loader/boot loader version of the
controller.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 MODBUS – e!RUNTIME 329
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
0xFAA0 = 0x1234,
0xFAA1 = 0xAAAA,
0xFAA2 = 0x5555
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
330 MODBUS – e!RUNTIME WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Diagnostics 331
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
12 Diagnostics
12.1 Operating and Status Messages
The following tables contain descriptions of all operating and status messages for
the controller which are indicated by LEDs.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
332 Diagnostics WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Diagnostics 333
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
334 Diagnostics WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The RUN LED indication depends on the runtime system enabled (CODESYS 2
or e!RUNTIME).
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Diagnostics 335
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
336 Diagnostics WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Diagnostics 337
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
338 Diagnostics WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Diagnostics 339
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Depending on the mobile network load and limitations set by the mobile network
service provider, the actual data rate may be slower than the signal quality allows
at the time.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
340 Diagnostics WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
3. After a further break the third flashing sequence is initiated. The number of
blink pulses indicates the error argument, which provides an additional
description of the error, e.g., which of the I/O modules connected to the
controller exhibits an error.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Diagnostics 341
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
342 Diagnostics WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
6. The blink code starts flickering when the start phase is initiated again. If
there is only one error, this process is repeated.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Diagnostics 343
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
If the diagnostics cannot be cleared by the measured specified for them, contact
WAGO support. Be ready to explain to them the blink code that is displayed.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
344 Diagnostics WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 242: Error Code 1, Explanation of Blink Codes and Procedures for Troubleshooting
Error
Cause Remedy
Argument
Invalid parameter - Switch off the power to the controller
- checksum for local and replace it.
bus interface - Then switch the power back on.
Internal buffer
overflow (max. - Switch off the power to the
amount of data controller.
1
exceeded) during - Reduce the number of I/O modules.
inline code - Switch the power back on.
generation.
- Update the controller firmware. If this
error persists, there is an error in the
I/O module. Identify the error as
follows:
- Switch off the power supply.
- Place the end module in the middle
of the I/O modules connected to the
system.
- Switch the power back on.
- If the I/O flashes red switch off the
Data type of the I/O power supply again and place the
2 module(s) is not end module in the middle of the first
supported half of the I/O modules (toward the
controller).
- If the LED is no longer flashing,
switch off the power supply and
place the end module in the middle
of the second half of the I/O modules
(away from the controller).
- Switch the power back on.
- Repeat this procedure until you
establish which I/O module is
defective. Then replace that module.
Unknown module - Switch off the power to the controller
3 type of the flash and replace it.
program memory - Then switch the power back on.
Error occurred while - Switch off the power to the controller
4 writing to the flash and replace it.
memory - Then switch the power back on.
Error occurred while
5
erasing a flash sector
The I/O module - Restart the controller by first
configuration after a switching off the power supply and
6 local bus reset differs then switching it back on, or
from the one after the by pressing the Reset button on the
last controller startup. controller.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Diagnostics 345
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 242: Error Code 1, Explanation of Blink Codes and Procedures for Troubleshooting
Error
Cause Remedy
Argument
Error occurred while - Switch off the power to the controller
7 writing to the serial and replace it.
EEPROM - Then switch the power back on.
Invalid hardware/
8
firmware combination
Invalid checksum in
9
the serial EEPROM
Fault when initializing
10
the serial EEPROM.
- Switch off the power supply to the
Error occurred while
controller and reduce the number of
11 reading from the
I/O modules.
serial EEPROM
- Then switch the power back on.
Time to access the - Switch off the power to the controller
12 serial EEPROM and replace it.
exceeded - Then switch the power back on.
- Switch off the power to the
Maximum number of controller.
14 gateway or mailbox - Reduce the number of gateway or
modules exceeded. mailbox modules.
- Then switch the power back on.
- Switch off the power to the
Maximum number of
controller.
16 I/O modules
- Reduce the number of I/O modules.
exceeded
- Then switch the power back on.
Table 243: Error Code 2, Explanation of Blink Codes and Procedures for Troubleshooting
Error
Cause Remedy
Argument
- Switch off the power to the
Maximum size of the
controller.
2 process image
- Reduce the number of I/O modules.
exceeded
- Switch the power back on.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
346 Diagnostics WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 244: Error Code 3, Explanation of Blink Codes and Procedures for Troubleshooting
Error
Cause Solution
Argument
If a power supply module (e.g., 750-602)
is connected to the controller, ensure
that this module functions properly (see
Section “LED Signaling”). If the supply
module does not exhibit any errors/faults,
the I/O module is defective. Identify the
defective I/O module as follows:
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Diagnostics 347
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 245: Error Code 4, Explanation of Blink Codes and Procedures for Troubleshooting
Error
Cause Solution
Argument
- Switch off the power to the controller.
Maximum permissible
- Reduce the number of I/O modules
-- number of I/O modules
to an acceptable value.
exceeded.
- Switch the power back on.
- Switch off the power to the controller.
- Replace the (n+1)th process data
module.
Local bus disruption after
- Switch the power back on.
n* the nth process data
module.
I/O modules that do not provide any data
are ignored (e.g., supply module without
diagnostics).
Table 246: Error Code 5, Explanation of Blink Codes and Procedures for Troubleshooting
Error
Cause Solution
Argument
- Switch off the power to the controller.
- Replace the (n+1)th process data
module.
Register communication
- Switch the power back on.
n* error during local bus
initialization
I/O modules that do not provide any data
are ignored (e.g., supply module without
diagnostics).
Table 247: Error Code 9, Explanation of Blink Codes and Procedures for Troubleshooting
Error
Cause Remedy
Argument
Invalid program Malfunction of the program sequence:
1
statement - Contact WAGO Support.
Malfunction of the program sequence:
2 Stack overflow
- Contact WAGO Support.
Malfunction of the program sequence:
3 Stack underflow
- Contact WAGO Support.
Malfunction of the program sequence:
4 Invalid event (NMI)
- Contact WAGO Support.
For CODESYS applications:
Local bus watchdog - Contact WAGO Support.
5
has triggered. For C applications:
- Check the time monitoring settings.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
348 Diagnostics WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
If the diagnostics cannot be cleared by the measured specified for them, contact
WAGO support. Be ready to explain to them the blink code that is displayed.
Table 249: Error Code 1, Explanation of Blink Codes and Procedures for Troubleshooting
Error
Cause Remedy
Argument
- Check the information of the
Error when connected I/O modules in the
synchronizing the CODESYS controller configuration.
5 controller - Adjust this to match the I/O module
configuration with the that is actually inserted.
local bus - Recompile the project.
- Reload the project into the controller.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Service 349
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
13 Service
13.1 Inserting and Removing the Memory Card
</dg_
2. Hold the memory card so that the contacts are visible on the right and the
diagonal edge is at the top, as depicted in the figure below.
3. Insert the memory card in this position into the slot provided for it.
4. Push the memory card all the way in. When you let go, the memory card
will move back a little and then snap in place (push-push mechanism).
5. Close the cover flap by flipping it down and pushing it in until it snaps into
place.
6. You can seal the closed flap through the hole in the enclosure next to the
flap.
3. To remove the memory card you must first push it slightly into the slot
(push-push mechanism). This releases the mechanical locking mechanism.
4. As soon as you let go of the memory card, the memory card is pushed out
a bit and you can remove it.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
350 Service WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
6. Close the cover flap by flipping it down and pushing it in until it snaps into
place.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Service 351
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
3. Hold the SIM card holder with the recess for the SIM card facing you.
4. Insert the SIM card into the SIM card holder in such a way that the shape of
the recess lines up with the shape of the SIM card and the contacts of the
SIM card are visible.
5. Reinsert the SIM card holder into the SIM card slot with the SIM card
(contacts visible) oriented towards the memory card slot until the SIM card
holder latches.
4. Reinsert the SIM card holder into the SIM card slot with the recess for the
SIM card oriented towards the memory card slot until the SIM card holder
latches.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
352 Service WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
3. Insert the memory card with the new firmware image into the memory card
slot.
5. After booting the controller, launch the WBM “Create Boot Image” page
(you may have to temporarily change the IP address).
The controller can now be started with the new firmware version.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Service 353
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
3. Insert the memory card with the new firmware image into the memory card
slot. Use a special downgrade image if necessary.
5. After booting the controller, launch the WBM “Create Boot Image” page
(you may have to temporarily change the IP address).
The controller can now be started with the new firmware version.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
354 Service WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
3. Press and hold both buttons until the “SYS” LED alternately flashes
red/green after approx. 8 seconds.
4. When the “SYS” LED flashes red/green alternately, release the mode
selector switch and Reset button.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Removal 355
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
14 Removal
2. Remove the controller from the assembly by pulling the release tab.
Electrical connections for data or power contacts to adjacent I/O modules are
disconnected when removing the controller.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
356 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
15 Appendix
15.1 Structure of Process Data for the I/O Modules
The process image for the I/O modules on the local bus is built up word-by-word
in the controller (with word alignment). The internal mapping method for data
greater than one byte conforms to Intel formats.
The following section describes the representation for WAGO-I/O SYSTEM 750
(750 and 753 Series) I/O modules in the process image, as well as the
configuration of the process values.
No direct access from fieldbus to the process image for I/O modules!
Any data that is required from the I/O module process image must be explicitly
mapped in the CODESYS program to the data in the fieldbus process image and
vice versa! Direct access is not possible!
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 357
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Some digital modules have an additional diagnostic bit per channel in the Input
Process Image. The diagnostic bit is used for detecting faults that occur (e.g.,
wire breaks and/or short circuits).
When analog input modules are also present in the node, the digital data is
always appended after the analog data in the Input Process Image, grouped into
bytes.
750-435
750-400, -401, -405, -406, -410, -411, -412, -427, -438, (and all variations),
753-400, -401, -405, -406, -410, -411, -412, -427
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
358 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
15.1.1.4 2 Channel Digital Input Module with Diagnostics and Output Process
Data
750-418,
753-418
The digital input module supplies a diagnostic and acknowledge bit for each input
channel. If a fault condition occurs, the diagnostic bit is set. After the fault
condition is cleared, an acknowledge bit must be set to re-activate the input. The
diagnostic data and input data bit is mapped in the Input Process Image, while
the acknowledge bit is in the Output Process Image.
Table 253: 2 Channel Digital Input Module with Diagnostics and Output Process Data
Input Process Image
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Diagnostic bit Diagnostic bit Data bit Data bit
S2 S1 DI 2 DI 1
Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 1
750-402, -403, -408, -409, -414, -415, -422, -423, -428, -432, -433, -1420, -1421,
-1422, -1423
753-402, -403, -408, -409, -415, -422, -423, -428, -432, -433, -440
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 359
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
15.1.1.7 8 Channel Digital Input Module PTC with Diagnostics and Output
Process Data
750-1425
The digital input module PTC provides via one logical channel 2 byte for the input
and output process image.
The signal state of PTC inputs DI1 … DI8 is transmitted to the fieldbus
coupler/controller via input data byte D0.
The fault conditions are transmitted via input data byte D1.
The channels 1 … 8 are switched on or off via the output data byte D1. The
output data byte D0 is reserved and always has the value “0“.
Table 256: 8 Channel Digital Input Module PTC with Diagnostics and Output Process Data
Input Process Image
Input Byte D0
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Signal Signal Signal Signal Signal Signal Signal Signal
status status status status status status status status
DI 8 DI 7 DI 6 DI 5 DI 4 DI 3 DI 2 DI 1
Channel 8 Channel 7 Channel 6 Channel 5 Channel 4 Channel 3 Channel 2 Channel 1
Input Byte D1
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Wire break Wire break Wire break Wire break Wire break Wire break Wire break Wire break
/short /short /short /short /short /short /short /short
circuit circuit circuit circuit circuit circuit circuit circuit
Data bit Data bit Data bit Data bit Data bit Data bit Data bit Data bit
DI 8 DI 7 DI 6 DI 5 DI 4 DI 3 DI 2 DI 1
Channel 8 Channel 7 Channel 6 Channel 5 Channel 4 Channel 3 Channel 2 Channel 1
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
360 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 361
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Some digital modules have an additional diagnostic bit per channel in the Input
Process Image. The diagnostic bit is used for detecting faults that occur (e.g.,
wire breaks and/or short circuits). For modules with diagnostic bit is set, also the
data bits have to be evaluated.
When analog output modules are also present in the node, the digital image data
is always appended after the analog data in the Output Process Image, grouped
into bytes.
750-523
The digital output modules deliver 1 bit via a process value Bit in the output
process image, which is illustrated in the input process image. This status image
shows "manual mode".
Table 258: 1 Channel Digital Output Module with Input Process Data
Input Process Image
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Status bit
not used “Manual
Operation“
750-501, -502, -509, -512, -513, -514, -517, -535, (and all variations),
753-501, -502, -509, -512, -513, -514, -517
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
362 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
15.1.2.3 2 Channel Digital Input Modules with Diagnostics and Input Process
Data
The digital output modules have a diagnostic bit for each output channel. When
an output fault condition occurs (i.e., overload, short circuit, or broken wire), a
diagnostic bit is set. The diagnostic data is mapped into the Input Process Image,
while the output control bits are in the Output Process Image.
Table 260: 2 Channel Digital Input Modules with Diagnostics and Input Process Data
Input Process Image
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Diagnostic Diagnostic
bit S 2 bit S 1
Channel 2 Channel 1
750-506,
753-506
The digital output module has 2-bits of diagnostic information for each output
channel. The 2-bit diagnostic information can then be decoded to determine the
exact fault condition of the module (i.e., overload, a short circuit, or a broken
wire). The 4-bits of diagnostic data are mapped into the Input Process Image,
while the output control bits are in the Output Process Image.
Table 261: 2 Channel Digital Input Modules with Diagnostics and Input Process Data 75x-506
Input Process Image
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Diagnostic Diagnostic Diagnostic Diagnostic
bit S 3 bit S 2 bit S 1 bit S 0
Channel 2 Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 1
Diagnostic bits S1/S0, S3/S2: = ‘00’ standard mode
Diagnostic bits S1/S0, S3/S2: = ‘01’ no connected load/short circuit against +24 V
Diagnostic bits S1/S0, S3/S2: = ‘10’ Short circuit to ground/overload
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 363
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
750-532
The digital output modules have a diagnostic bit for each output channel. When
an output fault condition occurs (i.e., overload, short circuit, or broken wire), a
diagnostic bit is set. The diagnostic data is mapped into the Input Process Image,
while the output control bits are in the Output Process Image.
Table 263: 4 Channel Digital Output Modules with Diagnostics and Input Process Data
Input Process Image
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Diagnostic Diagnostic Diagnostic
Diagnostic bit
bit bit bit
S1
S4 S3 S2
Channel 1
Channel 4 Channel 3 Channel 2
Diagnostic bit S = ‘0’ no Error
Diagnostic bit S = ‘1’ overload, short circuit, or broken wire
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
364 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
750-537
The digital output modules have a diagnostic bit for each output channel. When
an output fault condition occurs (i.e., overload, short circuit, or broken wire), a
diagnostic bit is set. The diagnostic data is mapped into the Input Process Image,
while the output control bits are in the Output Process Image.
Table 265: 8 Channel Digital Output Modules with Diagnostics and Input Process Data
Input Process Image
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Diagnostic Diagnostic Diagnostic Diagnostic Diagnostic Diagnostic Diagnostic Diagnostic
bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit
S8 S7 S6 S5 S4 S3 S2 S1
Channel 8 Channel 7 Channel 6 Channel 5 Channel 4 Channel 3 Channel 2 Channel 1
Diagnostic bit S = ‘0’ no Error
Diagnostic bit S = ‘1’ overload, short circuit, or broken wire
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 365
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
750-1502, -1506
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
366 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Therefore, only the 16-bit measurement values for each channel are in Intel
format and are mapped by word in the input process image for the controller.
When digital input modules are also present in the node, the analog input data is
always mapped into the Input Process Image in front of the digital data.
750-452, -454, -456, -461, -462, -465, -466, -467, -469, -472, -474, -475, 476, -
477, -478, -479, -480, -481, -483, -485, -492, (and all variations),
753-452, -454, -456, -461, -465, -466, -467, -469, -472, -474, -475, 476, -477,
478, -479, -483, -492, (and all variations)
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 367
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
750-450, -453, -455, -457, -459, -460, -468, (and all variations),
753-453, -455, -457, -459
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
368 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
750-493
The above Analog Input Modules have a total of 9 bytes of user data in both the
Input and Output Process Image (6 bytes of data and 3 bytes of control/status).
The following tables illustrate the Input and Output Process Image, which has a
total of 6 words mapped into each image.
Word alignment is applied.
750-451
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 369
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Therefore, only the 16-bit measurement values for each channel are in Intel
format and are mapped by word in the output process image for the controller.
When digital output modules are also present in the node, the analog output data
is always mapped into the Output Process Image in front of the digital data.
750-550, -552, -554, -556, -560, -562, 563, -585, (and all variations),
753-550, -552, -554, -556
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
370 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The control/status byte is required for the bidirectional data exchange of the
module with the higher-ranking control system. The control byte is transmitted
from the control system to the module and the status byte from the module to the
control system.
This allows, for example, setting of a counter with the control byte or displaying of
overshooting or undershooting of the range with the status byte.
The control/status byte always is in the process image in the Low byte.
The above Counter Modules have a total of 5 bytes of user data in both the Input
and Output Process Image (4 bytes of counter data and 1 byte of control/status).
The counter value is supplied as 32 bits. The following tables illustrate the Input
and Output Process Image, which has a total of 3 words mapped into each
image. Word alignment is applied.
Table 275: Counter Modules 750-404, (and all variations except of /000-005),
753-404, (and variation /000-003)
Input Process Image
Byte Destination
Offset Description
High Byte Low Byte
0 - S Status byte
1 D1 D0
Counter value
2 D3 D2
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 371
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
750-404/000-005
The above Counter Modules have a total of 5 bytes of user data in both the Input
and Output Process Image (4 bytes of counter data and 1 byte of control/ status).
The two counter values are supplied as 16 bits. The following tables illustrate the
Input and Output Process Image, which has a total of 3 words mapped into each
image. Word alignment is applied.
750-638,
753-638
The above Counter Modules have a total of 6 bytes of user data in both the Input
and Output Process Image (4 bytes of counter data and 2 bytes of
control/status). The two counter values are supplied as 16 bits. The following
tables illustrate the Input and Output Process Image, which has a total of 4 words
mapped into each image. Word alignment is applied.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
372 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The above Pulse Width modules have a total of 6 bytes of user data in both the
Input and Output Process Image (4 bytes of channel data and 2 bytes of control/
status). The two channel values are supplied as 16 bits. Each channel has its
own control/status byte. The following table illustrates the Input and Output
Process Image, which has a total of 4 words mapped into each image. Word
alignment is applied.
750-650, (and the variations /000-002, -004, -006, -009, -010, -011, -012, -013),
750-651, (and the variations /000-001, -002, -003),
750-653, (and the variations /000-002, -007),
753-650, -653
The above Serial Interface Modules with alternative data format have a total of 4
bytes of user data in both the Input and Output Process Image (3 bytes of serial
data and 1 byte of control/status). The following table illustrates the Input and
Output Process Image, which have a total of 2 words mapped into each image.
Word alignment is applied.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 373
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The above Serial Interface Modules with Standard Data Format have a total of 6
bytes of user data in both the Input and Output Process Image (5 bytes of serial
data and 1 byte of control/status). The following table illustrates the Input and
Output Process Image, which have a total of 3 words mapped into each image.
Word alignment is applied.
The Data Exchange modules have a total of 4 bytes of user data in both the Input
and Output Process Image. The following tables illustrate the Input and Output
Process Image, which has a total of 2 words mapped into each image.
Word alignment is applied.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
374 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The above SSI Transmitter Interface modules have a total of 4 bytes of user data
in the Input Process Image, which has 2 words mapped into the image.
Word alignment is applied.
The above Incremental Encoder Interface modules have 5 bytes of input data
and 3 bytes of output data. The following tables illustrate the Input and Output
Process Image, which have 4 words into each image. Word alignment is applied.
750-634
The above Incremental Encoder Interface module has 5 bytes of input data (6
bytes in cycle duration measurement mode) and 3 bytes of output data. The
following tables illustrate the Input and Output Process Image, which has 4 words
mapped into each image. Word alignment is applied.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 375
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 284: Incremental Encoder Interface Modules 750-634
Input Process Image
Byte Destination
Offset Description
High Byte Low Byte
0 - S not used Status byte
1 D1 D0 Counter word
2 - (D2) *) not used (Periodic time)
3 D4 D3 Latch word
*) If cycle duration measurement mode is enabled in the control byte, the cycle duration is
given as a 24-bit value that is stored in D2 together with D3/D4.
Output Process Image
Byte Destination
Offset Description
High Byte Low Byte
0 - C not used Control byte
1 D1 D0 Counter setting word
2 - -
not used
3 - -
750-637
The above Incremental Encoder Interface Module has a total of 6 bytes of user
data in both the Input and Output Process Image (4 bytes of encoder data and 2
bytes of control/status). The following table illustrates the Input and Output
Process Image, which have 4 words mapped into each image. Word alignment is
applied.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
376 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
750-635,
753-635
The above Digital Pulse Interface module has a total of 4 bytes of user data in
both the Input and Output Process Image (3 bytes of module data and 1 byte of
control/status). The following table illustrates the Input and Output Process
Image, which have 2 words mapped into each image. Word alignment is applied.
750-636
The DC-Drive Controller maps 6 bytes into both the input and output process
image. The data sent and received are stored in up to 4 input and output bytes
(D0 ... D3). Two control bytes (C0, C1) and two status bytes (S0/S1) are used to
control the I/O module and the drive.
In addition to the position data in the input process image (D0 … D3), it is
possible to display extended status information (S2 … S5). Then the three control
bytes (C1 … C3) and status bytes (S1 … S3) are used to control the data flow.
Bit 3 of control byte C1 (C1.3) is used to switch between the process data and
the extended status bytes in the input process image (Extended Info_ON). Bit 3
of status byte S1 (S1.3) is used to acknowledge the switching process.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 377
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Output Process Image
Byte Destination
Offset Description
High Byte Low Byte
0 C1 C0 Control byte C1 Control byte C0
Setpoint position Setpoint position
1 D1 D0
(LSB)
Setpoint position Setpoint position
2 D3 D2
(MSB)
750-670
Output byte D0 and input byte D0 are reserved and have no function assigned.
One I/O module control and status byte (C0, S0) and 3 application control and
status bytes (C1 ... C3, S1 ... S3) provide the control of the data flow.
Switching between the two process images is conducted through bit 5 in the
control byte (C0 (C0.5). Activation of the mailbox is acknowledged by bit 5 of the
status byte S0 (S0.5).
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
378 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Output Process Image
Byte Destination
Offset Description
High Byte Low Byte
0 reserved C0 reserved Control byte C0
1 D1 D0
2 D3 D2 Process data*) / Mailbox**)
3 D5 D4
Process data*) /
4 C3 D6 Control byte C3
reserved**)
5 C1 C2 Control byte C1 Control byte C2
*) Cyclic process image (Mailbox disabled)
**) Mailbox process image (Mailbox activated)
750-640
The RTC Module has a total of 6 bytes of user data in both the Input and Output
Process Image (4 bytes of module data and 1 byte of control/status and 1 byte ID
for command). The following table illustrates the Input and Output Process
Image, which have 3 words mapped into each image. Word alignment is applied.
750-641
The DALI/DSI Master module has a total of 6 bytes of user data in both the Input
and Output Process Image (5 bytes of module data and 1 byte of control/status).
The following tables illustrate the Input and Output Process Image, which have 3
words mapped into each image. Word alignment is applied.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 379
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Output Process Image
Byte Destination
Offset Description
High Byte Low Byte
DALI command,
0 D0 C Control byte
DSI dimming value
1 D2 D1 Parameter 2 DALI Address
2 D4 D3 Command extension Parameter 1
753-647
The DALI Multi-Master module occupies a total of 24 bytes in the input and
output range of the process image.
The DALI Multi-Master module can be operated in "Easy" mode (default) and
"Full" mode. "Easy" mode is used to transmit simply binary signals for lighting
control. Configuration or programming via DALI master module is unnecessary in
"Easy" mode.
Changes to individual bits of the process image are converted directly into DALI
commands for a pre-configured DALI network. 22 bytes of the 24-byte process
image can be used directly for switching of electronic ballasts (ECG), groups or
scenes in "Easy" mode. Switching commands are transmitted via DALI and group
addresses, where each DALI and each group address is represented by a 2-bit
pair.
The structure of the process data is described in detail in the following tables.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
380 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 291: Overview of Input Process Image in the "Easy" Mode
Input Process Image
Byte Designation
Offset Note
High Byte Low Byte
res. Status, activate broadcast
Bit 0: 1-/2-button mode
0 - S
Bit 2: Broadcast status ON/OFF
Bit 1,3-7: -
1 DA4…DA7 DA0…DA3 Bit pair for DALI address DA0:
2 DA12…DA15 DA8…DA11 Bit 1: Bit set = ON
3 DA20…DA23 DA16…DA19 Bit not set = OFF
4 DA28…DA31 DA24…DA27 Bit 2: Bit set = Error
5 DA36…DA39 DA32…DA35 Bit not set = No error
6 DA44…DA47 DA40…DA43 Bit pairs DA1 … DA63 similar to DA0.
7 DA52…DA55 DA48…DA51
8 DA60…DA63 DA56…DA59
Bit pair for DALI group address GA0:
9 GA4…GA7 GA0…GA3 Bit 1: Bit set = ON
Bit not set = OFF
Bit 2: Bit set = Error
10 GA12…GA15 GA8…GA11 Bit not set = No error
Bit pairs GA1 … GA15 similar to GA0.
11 - - Not in use
DA = DALI address
GA = Group address
Table 292: Overview of the Output Process Image in the "Easy" Mode“
Output Process Image
Byte Designation
Offset Note
High Byte Low Byte
res. Broadcast ON/OFF and activate:
Bit 0: Broadcast ON
Bit 1: Broadcast OFF
0 - S
Bit 2: Broadcast ON/OFF/dimming
Bit 3: Broadcast short ON/OFF
Bits 4 … 7: reserved
1 DA4…DA7 DA0…DA3 Bit pair for DALI address DA0:
2 DA12…DA15 DA8…DA11 Bit 1: short: DA switch ON
3 DA20…DA23 DA16…DA19 long: dimming, brighter
4 DA28…DA31 DA24…DA27 Bit 2: short: DA switch OFF
5 DA36…DA39 DA32…DA35 long: dimming, darker
6 DA44…DA47 DA40…DA43 Bit pairs DA1 … DA63 similar to DA0.
7 DA52…DA55 DA48…DA51
8 DA60…DA63 DA56…DA59
Bit pair for DALI group address GA0:
9 GA4…GA7 GA0…GA3 Bit 1: short: GA switch ON
long: dimming, brighter
Bit 2: short: GA switch OFF
10 GA12…GA15 GA8…GA11 long: dimming, darker
Bit pairs GA1 … GA15 similar to GA0.
11 Bit 8…15 Bit 0…7 Switch scene 0…15
DA = DALI address
GA = Group address
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 381
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
753-648
The process image of the LON® FTT module consists of a control/status byte and
23 bytes of bidirectional communication data that is processed by the WAGO-I/O-
PRO function block "LON_01.lib". This function block is essential for the function
of the LON® FTT module and provides a user interface on the control side.
750-642
The EnOcean radio receiver has a total of 4 bytes of user data in both the Input
and Output Process Image (3 bytes of module data and 1 byte of control/status).
The following tables illustrate the Input and Output Process Image, which have 2
words mapped into each image. Word alignment is applied.
750-643
The MP Bus Master Module has a total of 8 bytes of user data in both the Input
and Output Process Image (6 bytes of module data and 2 bytes of control/status).
The following table illustrates the Input and Output Process Image, which have 4
words mapped into each image. Word alignment is applied.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
382 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
750-644
The size of the process image for the Bluetooth® module can be adjusted to 12,
24 or 48 bytes.
It consists of a control byte (input) or status byte (output); an empty byte; an
overlay able mailbox with a size of 6, 12 or 18 bytes (mode 2); and the Bluetooth®
process data with a size of 4 to 46 bytes.
Thus, each Bluetooth® module uses between 12 and 48 bytes in the process
image. The sizes of the input and output process images are always the same.
The first byte contains the control/status byte; the second contains an empty
byte.
Process data attach to this directly when the mailbox is hidden. When the
mailbox is visible, the first 6, 12 or 18 bytes of process data are overlaid by the
mailbox data, depending on their size. Bytes in the area behind the optionally
visible mailbox contain basic process data. The internal structure of the
Bluetooth® process data can be found in the documentation for the Bluetooth®
750-644 RF Transceiver.
The mailbox and the process image sizes are set with the startup tool WAGO-
I/O-CHECK.
®
Table 295: Bluetooth RF-Transceiver 750-644
Input and Output Process Image
Byte Destination
Offset Description
High Byte Low Byte
Control/status
0 - C0/S0 not used
byte
1 D1 D0
2 D3 D2
3 D5 D4 Mailbox (0, 3, 6 or 9 words) and
... ... ... Process data (2-23 words)
max.
D45 D44
23
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 383
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
750-645
753-646
The KNX/TP1 module appears in router and device mode with a total of 24-byte
user data within the input and output area of the process image, 20 data bytes
and 2 control/status bytes. Even though the additional bytes S1 or C1 are
transferred as data bytes, they are used as extended status and control bytes.
The opcode is used for the read/write command of data and the triggering of
specific functions of the KNX/EIB/TP1 module. Word-alignment is used to assign
12 words in the process image. Access to the process image is not possible in
router mode. Telegrams can only be tunneled.
In device mode, access to the KNX data can only be performed via special
function blocks of the IEC application. Configuration using the ETS engineering
tool software is required for KNX.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
384 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 297: KNX/EIB/TP1 Module 753-646
Input Process Image
Byte Destination
Offset Description
High Byte Low Byte
0 - S0 not used Status byte
extended
1 S1 OP Opcode
Status byte
2 D1 D0 Data byte 1 Data byte 0
3 D3 D2 Data byte 3 Data byte 2
4 D5 D4 Data byte 5 Data byte 4
5 D7 D6 Data byte 7 Data byte 6
6 D9 D8 Data byte 9 Data byte 8
7 D11 D10 Data byte 11 Data byte 10
8 D13 D12 Data byte 13 Data byte 12
9 D15 D14 Data byte 15 Data byte 14
10 D17 D16 Data byte 17 Data byte 16
11 D19 D18 Data byte 19 Data byte 18
750-655
The length of the process image of the AS-interface master module can be set to
fixed sizes of 12, 20, 24, 32, 40 or 48 bytes.
It consists of a control or status byte, a mailbox with a size of 0, 6, 10, 12 or 18
bytes and the AS-interface process data, which can range from 0 to 32 bytes.
The first Input and output word, which is assigned to an AS-interface master
module, contains the status / control byte and one empty byte.
Subsequently the mailbox data are mapped, when the mailbox is permanently
superimposed (Mode 1).
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 385
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
In the operating mode with suppressible mailbox (Mode 2), the mailbox and the
cyclical process data are mapped next.
The following words contain the remaining process dat.
The mailbox and the process image sizes are set with the startup tool WAGO-
I/O-CHECK.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
386 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
750-610, -611
The modules provide 2 bits of diagnostics in the Input Process Image for
monitoring of the internal power supply.
750-622
The Binary Space Modules behave alternatively like 2 channel digital input
modules or output modules and seize depending upon the selected settings 1, 2,
3 or 4 bits per channel. According to this, 2, 4, 6 or 8 bits are occupied then either
in the process input or the process output image.
Table 300: Binary Space Module 750-622 (with Behavior Like 2 Channel Digital Input)
Input and Output Process Image
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
(Data bit (Data bit (Data bit (Data bit (Data bit (Data bit Data bit Data bit
DI 8) DI 7) DI 6) DI 5) DI 4) DI 3) DI 2 DI 1
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 387
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
All of the functions of the CODESYS system libraries listed below are supported.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
388 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 301: CODESYS System Libraries
Library Function C/IEC 61131
SysTaskInfo.lib Evaluation of task information in IEC 61131
the Online mode
Util.lib Various logical operations IEC 61131
Util_no_Real.lib Various logical operations IEC 61131
Additional information about the libraries is given in the online Help function for
CODESYS-IDE.
</dg_
15.2.1.2 SysLibCom.lib
- SysComClose
- SysComGetVersion2300
- SysComOpen
- SysComRead
- SysComSetSettings
- SysComSetSettingsEx
- SysComWrite
Additional information about this is given in the online Help function for
CODESYS-IDE.
15.2.1.3 SysLibFile.lib
- SysFileClose
- SysFileCopy
- SysFileDelete
- SysFileEOF
- SysFileGetPos
- SysFileGetSize
- SysFileGetTime
- SysFileOpen
- SysFileRead
- SysFileRename
- SysFileSetPos
- SysFileWrite
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 389
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Additional information about this is given in the online Help function for
CODESYS-IDE.
File and directory names distinguish between upper and lower case!
15.2.1.4 SysLibFileAsync.lib
- SysFileCloseAsync
- SysFileCopyAsync
- SysFileDeleteAsync
- SysFileEOFAsync
- SysFileGetPosAsync
- SysFileGetSizeAsync
- SysFileGetTimeAsync
- SysFileOpenAsync
- SysFileReadAsync
- SysFileRenameAsync
- SysFileSetPosAsync
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
390 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
- SysFileWriteAsync
Additional information about this is given in the online Help function for
CODESYS-IDE.
File and directory names distinguish between upper and lower case!
15.2.1.5 SysLibRtc.lib
- SysRtcGetHourMode
- SysRtcGetTime
- SysRtcSetTime
Additional information about this is given in the online Help function for
CODESYS-IDE.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 391
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
15.2.1.6 BusDiag.lib
- DiagGetBusState
- DiagGetState
The document containing a description of this library and the function blocks it
includes is available for download on the Internet at www.wago.com.
15.2.1.7 mod_com.lib
- ADD_PI_INFORMATION
- CRC16
- FBUS_ERROR_INFORMATION
- GET_DIGITAL_INPUT_OFFSET
- GET_DIGITAL_OUTPUT_OFFSET
- KBUS_ERROR_INFORMATION
- MOD_COM_VERSION
- PI_INFORMATION
- SET_DIGITAL_INPUT_OFFSET
- SET_DIGITAL_OUTPUT_OFFSET
- SLAVE_ADDRESS
The document containing a description of this library and the function blocks it
includes is available for download on the Internet at www.wago.com.
15.2.1.8 SerComm.lib
- SERCOMM
- SERCOMM_VERSION
The document containing a description of this library and the function blocks it
includes is available for download on the Internet at www.wago.com.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
392 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
15.2.1.9 WagoConfigToolLIB.lib
The following table shows call-ups that allow you to configure and parameterize
the controller from the PLC program or Linux® via the “ConfigToolFB” function
block (see parameter “stCallString”). In addition to WBM and the CBM, this is
another variant to configure the controller for operational requirements.
</dg_
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 393
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 306: Description of the Configuration Scripts for “CODESYS”
Parameters Status Call Output/Input Effecti
ve
Information
CODESYS get_coupler_details
Version of the CODESYS Immedia
Webserver read codesys-Webserver-
Webserver tely
Version version
Project Details
get_rts_info Immedia
Date read
project date tely
get_rts_info Immedia
Title read
project title tely
Display of the project information
get_rts_info Immedia
Version read specified in CODESYS (Menu >
project version tely
Project > Project Information)
get_rts_info Immedia
Author read
project author tely
get_rts_info Immedia
Description read
project description tely
CODESYS State
get_rts_info Display of the CODESYS status Immedia
State read
state (RUN or STOP) tely
Home Directory (Boot Project Location)
Storage logation for the home
directory.
Possible return values:
get_runtime_config
read - enabled: The home directory
homedir-on-sdcard
is on the SD card.
- disabled: The home directory
Home Directory
is on the boot medium. After
(Boot Project
Storage logation for the home restart
Location)
directory.
config_runtime Possible entries for the value are:
write homedir-on- - enabled: Put the home
sdcard=<Wert> directory on the SD card.
- disabled: The home directory
is on the boot medium.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
394 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 307: Description of the Configuration Scripts for “Networking - Host/Domain Name”
Parameters Status Call Output/Input Effecti
ve
Host Name
Display of the host name.
The return value is blank when
get_coupler_details Immedia
read /etc/hostname is empty.
hostname tely
Host Name For details see the parameter
“Actual Hostname.”
change_hostname Changing the host name. Immedia
write
hostname=<String> Input a host name for <String>. tely
The actual host name (if
Actual get_coupler_details /etc/hostname is empty, a unique Immedia
read
Hostname actual-hostname host name is generated from the tely
MAC address)
Domain Name
get_coupler_details
read Display of domain name
domain-name Immedia
Domain name
change_hostname Change the domain name. Enter tely
write
dnsdomain=<String> the domain name for <String>.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 395
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 308: Description of the Configuration Scripts for “Networking - TCP/IP”
Parameters Status Call Output/Input Effecti
ve
Default Gateway 1
Current status of the default
gateway 1.
get_default_gateway_
read Possible return values:
config number=1 state
Default - enabled Immedia
Gateway - disabled tely
config_default_gateway Possible entries for <Value>:
write number=1 - enabled
state=<stateval> - disabled
get_default_gateway_ Current IP address of the default
read
config number=1 value gateway 1
Enter the IP address of the
Default Immedia
default gateway 1 here.
Gateway config_default_gateway tely
write <gw> is an IP address with the
number=1 value=<gw>
format “Number. Number.
Number. Number.”
Current metric (cost factor) of the
get_default_gateway_
read default gateway 1
config number=1 metric
The default value is “20.”
Default Immedia
Enter the metric of the default
Gateway tely
config_default_gateway gateway 1 here.
write
number=1 metric=<n> <n> is a number between “0” and
“4.294.967.295.”
Default Gateway 2
See “Default Gateway 1.” When calling the gateway number, replace 1 with 2.
DNS Server 1
DNS server address with the
read get_dns_server 1
consecutive number 1
Set the address of the DNS
edit_dns_server server with 1 as the consecutive
dns-server-nr=1 number.
write/
change=change <Value> is an IP address with the Immedia
DNS Server 1 change
dns-server- format tely
name=<Value> “Number.Number.Number.Numbe
r.”
edit_dns_server
write/ Delete the DNS server with the
dns-server-nr=1
delete consecutive number 1.
delete=delete
DNS Server 2 … n
See “DNS Server 1.” When calling, adjust the server number (2 … n).
Add DNS Server
Add additional DNS addresses
here.
edit_dns_server
<Value> is an IP address with the Immedia
Add DNS server write add=add dns-server-
format tely
name=<Value>
“Number.Number.Number.Numbe
r.”
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
396 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 309: Description of the Configuration Scripts for “Networking - ETHERNET”
Parameters Status Call-Up Output/Input Effective
Switch Configuration
Query the switch
configuration:
read get_dsa_mode Possible return values:
- 0 = „switched“ mode
Interface Mode - 1 = „separated“ mode Immediately
Set the switch configuration:
set_dsa_mode -v Possible entries for <value>:
write
<value> - 0 = „switched“ mode
- 1 = „separated“ mode
Interface X1
Query the port state:
get_eth_config Possible return values:
read
X1 state - enabled
- disabled
Port State Immediately
config_ethernet port=X1
Activate port: enabled
state=enabled
write
config_ethernet port=X1
Deactivate port: disabled
state=disabled
Query the status of the
autonegotiation function:
get_eth_config
read Possible return values:
X1 autoneg
- on
- off
config_ethernet port=X1 Activate the autonegotiation
autoneg=on function: on
Deactivate the autonegotiation
function: off
Autonegotiation Note: You must also indicate Immediately
the speed and duplex value
config_ethernet port=X1 when you deactivate the
write
autoneg=off autonegotiation function.
speed=<value> Possible entries for speed:
duplex=<value> - 10M
- 100M
Possible entries for duplex:
- half
- full
get_eth_config
read Display of ETHERNET speed
X1 speed
get_eth_config
read Display of the Duplex mode
X1 duplex
Change the ETHERNET
Speed and speed and the Duplex mode. Immediately
Duplex Settings config_ethernet port=X1 Possible entries for speed:
autoneg=off - 10M
write
speed=<value> - 100M
duplex=<value> Possible entries for duplex:
- half
- full
Interface X2
See “Interface X1”. When calling these up, replace “X1” with “X2”.
</dg_
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 397
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 310: Description of the Configuration Scripts for “NTP”
Parameters Status Call Output/Input Effecti
ve
Configuration Data
Query the status of the NTP
server
get_ntp_config
read Possible return values are:
state
- enabled Immedia
State
- disabled tely
Possible entries for <Value>:
config_sntp
write - enabled
state=<Value>
- disabled
get_ntp_config Port number of the NTP server
read
port Immedia
Port
config_sntp Enter the port number for tely
write
port=<Value> <Value>.
Query the IP address of the time
get_ntp_config
read server: N = 1 … 4 for querying
time-server-<N>
one of 4 time servers.
Enter the IP address of 4 time
Immedia
Time Server servers
config_sntp tely
<N> can be a value from 1 to 4.
write time-server-
<Value> is an IP address with the
<N>=<Value>
format “Number. Number.
Number. Number.”
Query the time in seconds
get_ntp_config
read between two requests to the time
Update Time update-time Immedia
server.
(seconds) tely
config_sntp Specify the time-server's query
write
update-time=<Value> cycle (in s) for <Value>.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
398 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 311: Description of the Configuration Scripts for “Clock”
Parameters Status Call-Up Output/Input Effective
Clock
Time and Date
get_clock_data
read Local time and date
date-local
Date on device,
config_clock Immediately
local Change date. The format for
write type=local
<date> is: DD.MM.YYYY
date=<Datum>
get_clock_data
read Time/UTC
time-utc
Time on device,
Change time, based on UTC Immediately
UTC config_clock
write time. The format for <time> is:
type=utc time=<Time>
hh:mm:ss xx
get_clock_data
read Time/local time
time-local
Time on device,
Change time, based on local Immediately
local config_clock
write time. The format for <time> is:
type=local time=<Time>
hh:mm:ss xx
Presentation format either as
12 or 24-hour format:
get_clock_data
read Possible return values:
display-mode
- 12-hour-format
12-Hour- - 24-hour-format
Immediately
Format Set the presentation format
config_clock _ for the time.
write display_mode Possible entries for <Value>:
display-mode=<value> - 12-hour-format
- 24-hour-format
Time Zone
Currently set time zone –
get_clock_data
read original TZ string as stored in
tz-string
the operating system.
TZ-String Change TZ string directly. Immediately
config_timezone Example of <String>:
write
tz-string=<String> CET-1CEST,
M3.5.0/2,M10.5.0/3
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 399
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 312: Description of the Configuration Scripts for "Administration"
Parameters Status Call Output/Input Effecti
ve
Configuration of Service Interface
User of the serial interface.
Possible return values are:
- service (WAGO-I/O-CHECK,
get_service_interface_ WAGO-I/O-PRO,
read
config mode e!COCKPIT)
®
Configuration of - linux (Linux console)
immedia
Service - free (unused, free for
tely
Interface application)
User of the serial interface.
Possible entries for <value>:
config_service_interface
write - service
_config mode=<value>
- linux
- free
Reboot Controller
immedia
- write start_reboot Restart the controller.
tely
</dg_
</dg_
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
400 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 314: Description of Configuration Scripts for “Ports and Services” – “Network Services
Parameters Status Call-Up Output/Input Valid
Network Services
Telnet
Read the status of the Telnet
server.
get_port_state
read Possible return values:
telnet
- enabled Right
Telnet Port
- disabled away
config_port Possible entries for <Value>:
write port=telnet - enabled
state=<Value> - disabled
FTP
Read the status of the FTP
server.
config_ssl
read Possible return values:
ftp-status
- enabled Right
FTP Port
- disabled away
Possible entries for <Value>:
config_port
write - enabled
port=ftp state=<Value>
- disabled
FTPS
Read the status of the FTPS port.
Possible return values:
read config_ssl ftps-status
- enabled
- disabled Right
FTPS Port
Activate/Deactivate FTPS. away
config_port port=ftps Possible entries for <Value>:
write
state=<Value> - enabled
- disabled
HTTP
Read the status of the HTTP port.
Possible return values:
read config_ssl http-status
- enabled
- disabled Right
HTTP Port
Activate/Deactivate HTTP. away
config_port port=http Possible entries for <Value>:
write
state=<Value> - enabled
- disabled
HTTPS
Read the status of the HTTPS
port.
read config_ssl https-status Possible return values:
- enabled
Right
HTTPS Port - disabled
away
Activate/Deactivate HTTPS.
config_port port=https Possible entries for <Value>:
write
state=<Value> - enabled
- disabled
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 401
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 315: Description of Configuration Scripts for “Ports and Services” – “PLC Runtime Services”
Parameters Status Call Output/Input Effecti
ve
General Settings
Version of the enabled PLC
runtime
get_runtime_config Possible return values:
read
running-version - 0 = no runtime enabled
- 2 = CODESYS 2 enabled
- 3 = e!RUNTIME enabled
PLC runtime Setting and, if necessary, Immedia
version stopping of the previous runtime tely
version and starting of required
config_runtime runtime- version
write
version=<value> Possible entries for <value>:
- 0 = do not enable runtime
- 2 = enable CODESYS2
- 3 = enable e!RUNTIME
Memory location for a boot
project of the runtime application
Possible return values:
get_runtime_config
read - HOME:// (saving on internal
boot-project
memory)
Boot project - CARD:// (saving on the Immedia
location memory card) tely
Possible entries for <value>:
- HOME:// (saving on internal
config_runtime boot-
write memory)
project=<value>
- CARD:// (saving on the
memory card)
Calling web page when only
entering the IP address in the
web browser
get_runtime_config
read Possible return values:
default-webpage
- WBM (web based
Default web Immedia
management)
page tely
- Webvisu (web visualization)
Possible entries for <value>:
config_runtime default- - WBM (web based
write
webpage=<value> management)
- Webvisu (web visualization)
config_linux_user
Change user=admin new-
Change the PLC runtime access Immedia
authentication write password=<value>
password tely
password confirm-
password=<value>
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
402 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 315: Description of Configuration Scripts for “Ports and Services” – “PLC Runtime Services”
Parameters Status Call Output/Input Effecti
ve
CODESYS 2 Settings
Read status of the runtime-
get_runtime_config cfg- specific Webserver
read version=2 Webserver- Possible return values:
state - enabled
CODESYS2
- disabled Immedia
Webserver
Enable/disable runtime-specific tely
State
config_runtime cfg- Webserver
write version=2 Webserver- Possible entries for <value>:
state=<value> - enabled
- disabled
Read status of the port
authentication for communication
between the CODESYS 2 PC
get_runtime_config cfg-
read software and the controller
CODESYS2 version=2 authentication
Possible return values: Immedia
Port
- enabled tely
Authentication
- disabled
config_runtime cfg- Possible entries for <value>:
write version=2 - enabled
authentication=<value> - disabled
Read status of the port for
communication between the
CODESYS 2 PC software and
get_runtime_config
read the controller
service-state
CODESYS2 Possible return values: Immedia
Service State - enabled tely
- disabled
Possible entries for <value>:
config_runtime service-
write - enabled
state=<value>
- disabled
Read value of set network port
get_runtime_config for communication between PC
read
CODESYS2 comm-port and controller
Immedia
Communication Default value is 2455
tely
Port Change port number
config_runtime comm-
write Enter the TCP/IP port number for
port=<value>
<value>.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 403
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 315: Description of Configuration Scripts for “Ports and Services” – “PLC Runtime Services”
Parameters Status Call Output/Input Effecti
ve
e!Runtime Settings
Read status of the runtime-
get_runtime_config cfg- specific Webserver
read version=3 Webserver- Possible return values
state - enabled
e!RUNTIME
- disabled Immedia
Webserver
Enable/disable runtime-specific tely
State
config_runtime cfg- Webserver
write version=3 Webserver- Possible entries for <value>:
state=<value> - enabled
- disabled
Read status of the port
authentication for communication
between the e!COCKPIT PC
get_runtime_config cfg-
read software and the controller
e!RUNTIME version=3 authentication
Possible return values: Immedia
Port
- enabled tely
Authentication
- disabled
config_runtime cfg- Possible entries for <value>:
write version=3 - enabled
authentication= <value> - disabled
</dg_
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
404 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 316: Description of Configuration Scripts for “Ports and Services” – “SSH/TFTP”
Parameters Status Call-Up Output/Input Valid
SSH
SSH Server
Read the status of the SSH port.
Possible return values:
read get_ssh_config state
- enabled
- disabled
Indicates whether logon as root is
permitted.
get_ssh_config root-
read Possible return values:
access-state
- enabled
- disabled
Indicates whether authentication
by password (instead of PKI key
get_ssh_config files) is permitted.
read
password-request-state Possible return values:
- enabled
- disabled
get_ssh_config port- Right
SSH read Specifies the SSH port
number away
Activate/Deactivate SSH service.
config_ssh Possible entries for <Value>:
write
state=<Value> - enabled
- disabled
config_ssh port-
write Set the SSH port
number=<Value>
Permit/Prohibit logon as root.
config_ssh root-access- Possible entries for <Value>:
write
state-value=<Value> - enabled
- disabled
Permit/Prohibit authentication by
config_ssh password- password.
write request-state- Possible entries for <Value>:
value=<Value> - enabled
- disabled
TFTP
TFTP Server
Read the status of the TFTP port.
Possible return values:
read get_tftp_config state
- enabled
- disabled
get_tftp_config
read Read the TFTP main directory.
download-dir Right
TFTP
Activate/Deactivate TFTP port. away
config_tftp Possible entries for <Value>:
write
state=<Value> - enabled
- disabled
config_tftp download-
write Set the TFTP main directory.
dir=<Value>
<
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 405
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 317: Description of Configuration Scripts for “SNMP”
Parameters Status Call-Up Output/Input Valid
General SNMP information parameters
get_snmp_data Specifies the SNMP parameter Right
read
device-name “sysName”. away
Name of device Change the SNMP parameter
config_snmp After
write “sysName”
device-name=<Value> * restart
(<Value> = string).
get_snmp_data Specifies the SNMP parameter Right
read
description “sysDescr”. away
Description Change the SNMP parameter
config_snmp After
write “sysDescr”
description=<Value> * restart
(<Value> = string).
get_snmp_data Specifies the SNMP Right
read
physical-location “sysLocation” parameter. away
Physical
config_snmp Change the SNMP parameter
location After
write physical- “sysLocation”
* restart
location=<Value> (<Value> = string).
get_snmp_data Specifies the SNMP “sysContact” Right
read
contact parameter. away
Contact Change the SNMP parameter
config_snmp After
write “sysContact”
contact=<Value> restart
(<Value> = string).
*
When entering values, the blank characters must be filled by either “+” or “%20”. If this is not
done, the input is not recognized as a coherent string.
SNMP Manager configuration for v1 and v2c
Outputs the status of the SNMP
protocol for v1/v2c as a string.
get_snmp_data Right
Protocol status read Possible return values:
v1-v2c-state away
- enabled
- disabled
Local
get_snmp_data Specifies the community name Right
Community read
v1-v2c-community-name set for v1/v2c/ away
Name
Activates/deactivates the v1/v2c
protocol (<Value1> = enabled or
disabled) and assigns a
community name. (<Value2> =
string without spaces, min. 1,
max. 32 characters).
config_snmp
Protocol
v1-v2c-state=<Value1> After
Status/Commu write Note:
v1-v2c-community- restart
nity Name No community name is required
name=<Value2>
for deactivation.
Activation is only possible by
entering a community name. A
community name can only be
saved when the protocol is
activated.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
406 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 317: Description of Configuration Scripts for “SNMP”
Parameters Status Call-Up Output/Input Valid
SNMP Trap Receiver Configuration for v1 and v2c
Any number of trap receivers can be configured. A trap receiver that has been set up is always
active; the data set must be completely deleted to deactivate it.
Specifies the IP address of the
trap receiver that the controller is
to send the v1 or v2 traps to.
Other parameters:
<Value2> = IP address
config_snmp
(number.number.number.number
v1-v2c-trap-receiver-
) that the controller is to send the
edit=<Value1>
traps to.
v1-v2c-trap-receiver-
Creating/ <Value3>: Community string
address=<Value2> After
deleting a trap write (string), which the controller
v1-v2c-trap-receiver- restart
receiver enters in the trap header.
community-
<Value4>: SNMP version, via
name=<Value3>
which the traps are sent (v1 or
v1-v2c-trap-receiver-
v2c).
version=<Value4>
Note:
All parameters must also be
entered when deleting a trap
receiver, as this is the only
means to uniquely identify the
data set.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 407
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 317: Description of Configuration Scripts for “SNMP”
Parameters Status Call-Up Output/Input Valid
Configuration of SNMP v3
Any number of SNMP v3 users can be created. A user that has been set up is always active; the
complete data set must be deleted to deactivate a user.
Specifies the user name for the
v3 user.
The <number> parameter
enables consecutive reading of
the related data from the
get_snmp_data individually configured trap
Authentication Right
read v3-auth-name receiver for a short period of time
Name away
<Nummer> (without interim changing of the
data). This is a consecutive
number that is not connected to
the data. If the number is not
included, the data of the first user
are read.
Specifies the type of encryption
that the v3 user uses (none,
Authentication get_snmp_data Right
read MD5, or SHA).
encryption type v3-auth-type <Number> away
Parameter <number> see
“Authentication Name”.
Specifies the key string for
Authentication get_snmp_data authentication. Right
read
key v3-auth-key <Nummer> Parameter <number> see away
“Authentication Name”.
Specifies the type of privacy
encryption for the v3 user (none,
Privacy get_snmp_data Right
read DES, or AES).
encryption type v3-privacy <number> away
Parameter <number> see
“Authentication Name”.
Specifies the key string for
privacy. If nothing is entered, the
get_snmp_data
SNMP agent uses the Right
Privacy key read v3-privacy-key
“Authentication Key”. away
<number>
Parameter <number> see
“Authentication Name”.
IP address of an SNMP manager
that the agent traps for this v3
get_snmp_data user are sent to. If nothing is
Trap receiver Right
read v3-notification-receiver entered here, no traps are sent
address away
<number> for this user.
Parameter <number> see
“Authentication Name”.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
408 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 317: Description of Configuration Scripts for “SNMP”
Parameters Status Call-Up Output/Input Valid
Creating a new v3 user.
v3-auth-name: User name, string
without spaces, maximum of 32
characters. This must be a new,
unique user name.
Parameters:
User name (<Value1> = string)
Encryption method. (<Value2> =
config_snmp
none, MD5 or SHA).
v3-edit=add
Key string for authentication,
v3-auth-name=<Value1>
(<Value3> = String with at least
v3-auth-type=<Value2>
eight and a maximum of 32
Add new v3- v3-auth-key=<Value3> After
write characters)
User v3-privacy=<Value4> restart
Privacy encryption method
v3-privacy-
(<Value4> = none, DES or AES).
key=<Value5>
Privacy key string (<Value5> =
v3-notification-
String with at least eight and a
receiver=<Value6>
maximum of 32 characters), can
also be blank; in this case the
authentication key will be used.
The IP address of a trap receiver
is transmitted as the notification
receiver (<Value6> =
number.number.number.number)
. This parameter is not required if
no v3 traps are to be sent.
Deleting a v3 user that has been
set up.
Because the doubled allocation
config_snmp
of the same user name is After
Delete v3 user write v3-edit=delete
prevented when creating a user, restart
v3-auth-name=<Value>
the name is sufficient to uniquely
identify a data set (<Value> =
string).
15.2.1.10 WagoLibCpuUsage.lib
- CPU_Usage
The document containing the description of the library and the function block it
includes is available for download on the Internet at www.wago.com.
15.2.1.11 WagoLibDiagnosticIDs.lib
- DIAGNOSTIC_SEND_ID
- DIAGNOSTIC_SET_TEXT_FOR_ID
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 409
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
The document containing the description of the library and the function block it
includes is available for download on the Internet at www.wago.com.
15.2.1.12 WagoLibLed.lib
- LED_SET_STATIC
- LED_SET_BLINK
- LED_SET_FLASH
- LED_SET_ERROR
- LED_RESET_ERROR
- LED_RESET_ALL_ERRORS
- LED_GET_STATE
- LED_GET_STATE_ASYNC
The document containing a description of this library and the function blocks it
includes is available for download on the Internet at www.wago.com.
15.2.1.13 WagoLibNetSnmp.lib
- snmpGetValueCustomOID_INT32
- snmpGetValueCustomOID_STRING
- snmpGetValueCustomOID_UINT32
- snmpRegisterCustomOID_INT32
- snmpRegisterCustomOID_STRING
- snmpRegisterCustomOID_UINT32
- snmpSetValueCustomOID_INT32
- snmpSetValueCustomOID_STRING
- snmpSetValueCustomOID_UINT32
The document containing the description of the library and the function block it
includes is available for download on the Internet at www.wago.com.
15.2.1.14 WagoLibNetSnmpManager.lib
- SNMPM_DINT_TO_TLV
- SNMPM_UDINT_TO_TLV
- SNMPM_STRING_TO_TLV
- SNMPM_TLV_TO_DINT
- SNMPM_TLV_TO_UDINT
- SNMPM_TLV_TO_STRING
- SNMPM_GET
- SNMPM_GET_V3
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
410 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
- SNMPM_SET
- SNMPM_SET_V3
The document containing a description of this library and the function blocks it
includes is available for download on the Internet at www.wago.com.
15.2.1.15 WagoLibSSL.lib
- SSL_CTX
- SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations
- SSL_CTX_sess_set_cache_size
- SSL_CTX_set_client_CA_list
- SSL_CTX_set_method
- SSL_CTX_use_certificate_file
- SSL_CTX_use_PrivateKey_file
- SSL_free
- SSL_get_error
- SSL_Hndshk_Accept
- SSL_Hndshk_Connect
- SSL_load_client_CA_file
- SSL_read
- SSL_shutdown
- SSL_write
The document containing a description of this library and the function blocks it
includes is available for download on the Internet at www.wago.com.
15.2.1.16 WagoLibTerminalDiag.lib
- GET_TERMINALDIAG
The document containing a description of this library and the function blocks it
includes is available for download on the Internet at www.wago.com.
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 List of Figures 411
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
List of Figures
Figure 1: View of device .....................................................................................27
Figure 2: Marking Area for Serial Numbers ........................................................29
Figure 3: Data Contacts .....................................................................................30
Figure 4: Power Jumper Contacts ......................................................................31
Figure 5: CAGE CLAMP® connections ...............................................................32
Figure 6: Service Interface (Closed and Open Flap) ...........................................33
Figure 7: Network Connections – X1, X2 ............................................................34
Figure 8: RS-232/RS-485 – Communication Connection – X3 ...........................35
Figure 9: Termination with DTE-DCE Connection (1:1) ......................................36
Figure 10: Termination with DTE-DTE Connection (Cross-Over) .......................36
Figure 11: RS-485 Bus Termination ...................................................................37
Figure 12: Mobile Radio Antenna Connection ....................................................38
Figure 13: Power Supply Indicating Elements ....................................................39
Figure 14: Indicating elements for fieldbus/system .............................................40
Figure 15: Indicating Elements, Memory Card Slot.............................................41
Figure 16: Indicating Elements, RJ-45 Jacks......................................................42
Figure 17: Mobile Radio Network Status Indicators ............................................43
Figure 18: Mode Selector Switch ........................................................................44
Figure 19: Reset Button .....................................................................................45
Figure 20: Slot for SD Memory Card ..................................................................46
Figure 21: SIM Card Slot ....................................................................................47
Figure 22: Schematic diagram............................................................................48
Figure 23: Connecting the PFC Controller Generation to a Cloud ......................68
Figure 24: Spacing .............................................................................................80
Figure 25: Release Tab of Controller..................................................................82
Figure 26: Connecting a Conductor to a CAGE CLAMP® ...................................83
Figure 27: Power Supply Concept ......................................................................85
Figure 28: “Open DHCP”, Example Figure .........................................................89
Figure 29: CBM Starting Screen .........................................................................90
Figure 30: CBM – Selecting “Networking”...........................................................91
Figure 31: CBM – Selecting “TCP/IP” .................................................................91
Figure 32: CBM – Selecting “IP address” ...........................................................91
Figure 33: CBM – Selecting the IP Address .......................................................92
Figure 34: CBM – Entering a New IP Address ....................................................92
Figure 35: “WAGO Ethernet Settings” – Starting Screen (Example) ...................93
Figure 36: “WAGO Ethernet Settings” – “Network” Tab ......................................94
Figure 37: Example of a Function Test ...............................................................96
Figure 38: Entering Authentication ...................................................................103
Figure 39: Password Reminder ........................................................................104
Figure 40: WBM Browser Window (Example) ...................................................106
Figure 41: WBM Status Information (Example).................................................107
Figure 42: CBM main menu (example) .............................................................177
Figure 43: “WAGO Ethernet Settings” – Start Screen .......................................228
Figure 44: “WAGO Ethernet Settings” – Communication Link ..........................229
Figure 45: “WAGO Ethernet Settings” – Identification Tab (Example) ..............230
Figure 46: “WAGO Ethernet Settings” – Network Tab ......................................231
Figure 47: “WAGO Ethernet Settings” – Protocol Tab ......................................233
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
412 List of Figures WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Figure 48: “WAGO Ethernet Settings” – Status Tab .........................................234
Figure 49: Target System Settings (1) ..............................................................236
Figure 50: Target System Settings (2) ..............................................................236
Figure 51: Creating a New Function Block .......................................................237
Figure 52: Programming Interface with the PLC_PRG Program Module ..........237
Figure 53: “Resources” Tab..............................................................................238
Figure 54: Control Configuration – Edit ............................................................239
Figure 55: “Start WAGO-I/O-CHECK and Scan” Button ...................................239
Figure 56: WAGO-I/O-CHECK – Starting Screen .............................................240
Figure 57: I/O Configurator Empty ....................................................................241
Figure 58: “Add I/O Modules” Button ................................................................241
Figure 59: “Module Selection” Window .............................................................242
Figure 60: I/O Configurator with Defined I/O Modules ......................................242
Figure 61: Variable declaration.........................................................................243
Figure 62: Control Configuration: I/O Modules with Their Associated Addresses
................................................................................................................243
Figure 63: Program Function Block ..................................................................244
Figure 64: Input Assistant for Selecting Variables ............................................244
Figure 65: Example of an Allocation .................................................................245
Figure 66: Creating a Communication Link – Step 1 ........................................246
Figure 67: Creating a Communication Link – Step 2 ........................................247
Figure 68: Creating a Communication Link – Step 3 ........................................247
Figure 69: Task Configuration ..........................................................................249
Figure 70: Changing Task Names 1 .................................................................250
Figure 71: Call-up to Add to the Program Module .............................................251
Figure 72: Cyclic Task ......................................................................................252
Figure 73: Freewheeling Task ..........................................................................253
Figure 74: Debugging (Case 1) ........................................................................254
Figure 75: Debugging (Case 2) ........................................................................254
Figure 76: Debugging (Case 3) ........................................................................255
Figure 77: Debugging (Case 4) ........................................................................255
Figure 78: Debugging (Case 5) ........................................................................256
Figure 79: Debugging (Case 6) ........................................................................256
Figure 80: Debugging (Case 7) ........................................................................257
Figure 81: CODESYS – System Events ...........................................................258
Figure 82: CODESYS Program Provokes Division by “0” .................................260
Figure 83: CODESYS – Creating and Activating an Event Handler ..................260
Figure 84: CODESYS – New Module has been Generated ..............................261
Figure 85: CODESYS – Enter the Event in a Global Variable...........................261
Figure 86: CODESYS – Variable Contents Prior to Division by “0” ...................262
Figure 87: CODESYS – Variable Contents After Division by “0” and Call-up of the
Event Handler .........................................................................................262
Figure 88: Process Image ................................................................................263
Figure 89: Flag Area ........................................................................................264
Figure 90: Local Bus Synchronization 01 .........................................................269
Figure 91: Local Bus Synchronization 02 .........................................................270
Figure 92: Local Bus Synchronization 03 .........................................................271
Figure 93: Local Bus Synchronization 04 .........................................................272
Figure 94: Local Bus (KBus) Settings ...............................................................273
Figure 95: Program Memory (Example) ...........................................................276
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 List of Figures 413
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Figure 96: Data Memory and Function Block Limitation (Example)...................277
Figure 97: Remanent Main Memory (Example) ................................................278
Figure 98: Flag and Retain Memory (Example) ................................................278
Figure 99: General Target System Settings......................................................279
Figure 100: Selecting the Visualization Technique in the Target System Settings
................................................................................................................280
Figure 101: Creating the PLC_VISU Starting Visualization ...............................281
Figure 102: Remanent Main Memory ...............................................................289
Figure 103: CODESYS PLC Configuration - MODBUS Settings ......................291
Figure 104: MODBUS Process Image ..............................................................297
Figure 105: Flag Area.......................................................................................298
Figure 106: State Diagram, STANDARD_WATCHDOG Operation Mode .........308
Figure 107: State Diagram, ALTERNATIVE_WATCHDOG Operation Mode ....309
Figure 108: State Diagram, Switchover Operation Mode ..................................310
Figure 109: MODBUS Address Overview .........................................................319
Figure 110: State Diagram, ADVANCED_WATCHDOG Operation Mode.........322
Figure 111: State Diagram, SIMPLE_WATCHDOG Operation Mode ...............323
Figure 112: State Diagram, Switching Operation Modes ..................................323
Figure 113: Power Supply Indicating Elements ................................................331
Figure 114: Mobile Radio Network Status Indicators ........................................332
Figure 115: Indicating elements for fieldbus/system .........................................333
Figure 116: Flashing Sequence Process Diagram............................................341
Figure 117: Inserting the Memory Card ............................................................349
Figure 118: Inserting the SIM Card...................................................................351
Figure 119: Release Tab of Controller..............................................................355
Figure 120: Graphical Representation of the “ConfigToolFB” Function Block ...392
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
414 List of Tables WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
List of Tables
Table 1: Variants ................................................................................................15
Table 2: Number Notation ..................................................................................18
Table 3: Font Conventions .................................................................................18
Table 4: Legend for Figure “View” ......................................................................27
Table 5: Legend for Figure “Power Jumper Contacts” ........................................31
Table 6: Legend for figure “CAGE CLAMP® connections” ..................................32
Table 7: Service Interface ..................................................................................33
Table 8: Legend for Figure “Network Connections – X1, X2” ..............................34
Table 9: Legend for Figure “RS-232/RS-485 – Communication Connection – X3”
..................................................................................................................35
Table 10: Function of RS-232 Signals for DTE/DCE ..........................................36
Table 11: Legend for Figure “Power Supply Indicating Elements” ......................39
Table 12: Legend for Figure “Fieldbus/System Indicating Elements” ..................40
Table 13: Legend for Figure “Indicating Elements, Memory Card Slot” ...............41
Table 14: Legend for Figure “Indicating Elements, RJ-45 Jacks” ........................42
Table 15: Legend for the “Mobile Radio Network Status Indicators” Figure ........43
Table 16: Mode Selector Switch .........................................................................44
Table 17: Mode Selector Switch .........................................................................44
Table 18: Legend for Figure “SIM Card Slot” ......................................................47
Table 19: Technical Data − Mechanical Data .....................................................49
Table 20: Technical Data – System Data ...........................................................49
Table 21: Technical Data – Power Supply ..........................................................49
Table 22: Technical Data – Clock .......................................................................50
Table 23: Technical Data – Programming ..........................................................50
Table 24: Technical Data – Local Bus ................................................................50
Table 25: Technical Data – ETHERNET.............................................................51
Table 26: Technical Data – Communication Interface ........................................51
Table 27: Technical Data – Mobile Radio Modem ..............................................51
Table 28: Technical Data – Field Wiring .............................................................52
Table 29: Technical Data – Power Jumper Contacts ..........................................52
Table 30: Technical Data – Data Contacts .........................................................52
Table 31: Technical Data – Climatic Environmental Conditions ..........................52
Table 32: WBM Users ........................................................................................57
Table 33: Linux® Users .......................................................................................57
Table 34: List of Parameters Transmitted via DHCP ..........................................65
Table 35: Components of the Cloud Connectivity Software Package .................67
Table 36: Loading a Boot Project .......................................................................76
Table 37: WAGO DIN Rails ................................................................................80
Table 38: Filter Modules for 24 V Supply ............................................................85
Table 39: Default IP Addresses for ETHERNET Interfaces ................................88
Table 40: Network Mask 255.255.255.0 .............................................................88
Table 41: User Settings in the Default State .....................................................104
Table 42: Access Rights for WBM Pages .........................................................104
Table 43: WBM “Status Information” Page – “Controller Details” Group ...........109
Table 44: WBM “Status Information Page – “Network Details Xn” Group(s) .....109
Table 45: WBM “General PLC Runtime Configuration” Page – “General PLC
Runtime Configuration” Group ................................................................110
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 List of Tables 415
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 46: WBM “PLC Runtime Information” Page – “PLC Runtime” Group ......112
Table 47: WBM “PLC Runtime Information” Page – “Project Details” Group ....112
Table 48: WBM “PLC Runtime Information” Page – “Task n” Group(s) ............113
Table 49: WBM “PLC WebVisu” Page – “Web Server Configuration” Group ....114
Table 50: WBM “Configuration of Host and Domain Name” Page – “Hostname”
Group ......................................................................................................115
Table 51: WBM “Configuration of Host and Domain Name” Page – “Domain
Name” Group ..........................................................................................115
Table 52: WBM “TCP/IP Configuration” Page – “IP Configuration (Xn)” Group(s)
................................................................................................................116
Table 53: WBM “TCP/IP Configuration” Page – “Default Gateway n” Group ....117
Table 54: WBM “TCP/IP Configuration” Page – “DNS Server” Group...............118
Table 55: WBM “Ethernet Configuration” Page – “Switch Configuration” Group
................................................................................................................119
Table 56: WBM “Ethernet Configuration” Page – “Interface Xn” Groups ...........120
Table 57: WBM “Routing” Page – “General Routing Configuration” Group .......121
Table 58: WBM “Routing” Page – “Static Routes“ Group..................................122
Table 59: WBM “Routing” Page – “IP-Masquerading” Group ............................123
Table 60: WBM “Routing” Page – “Port Forwarding” Group .............................124
Table 61: WBM “General Firewall Configuration” Page – “Global Firewall
Parameters” Group .................................................................................125
Table 62: WBM “General Firewall Configuration” Page – “Firewall Parameter
Interface Xn” Group.................................................................................126
Table 63: WBM “Configuration of MAC Address Filter” Page – “Global MAC
Address Filter State” Group.....................................................................127
Table 64: WBM “Configuration of MAC Address Filter” Page – “MAC Address
Filter State Xn” Group .............................................................................128
Table 65: WBM “Configuration of MAC Address Filter” Page – “MAC Address
Filter Whitelist” Group .............................................................................128
Table 66: WBM “Configuration of User Filter” Page – “User Filter” Group .......129
Table 67: WBM “Configuration of User Filter” Page – “User Filter n” Group .....129
Table 68: WBM “Configuration of User Filter” Page – “Add New User Filter”
Group ......................................................................................................130
Table 69: WBM “Configuration of Time and Date” Page – “Date on Device” Group
................................................................................................................131
Table 70: WBM “Configuration of Time and Date” Page – “Time on Device”
Group ......................................................................................................131
Table 71: WBM “Configuration of Time and Date” Page – “Time Zone” Group .132
Table 72: WBM “Configuration of Time and Date” Page – “TZ String” Group ...133
Table 73: WBM “Configuration of the users for the Web-based Management”
Page – “Change Password for Selected User” Group .............................134
Table 74: WBM “Create Bootable Image” page – “Create bootable image from
active partition” Group .............................................................................135
Table 75: WBM “Configuration of Serial Interface RS232” Page – “Assign Owner
of Serial Interface” Group ........................................................................137
Table 76: WBM “Configuration of Serial Interface RS-232” page – “Assign Owner
of Service Interface” Group .....................................................................138
Table 77: “Firmware-Backup” WBM Page ........................................................140
Table 78: “Firmware Restore” WBM Page ........................................................142
Table 79: WBM “Mass Storage” Page – “<Device Name>” Group ....................145
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
416 List of Tables WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 80: WBM “Mass Storage” Page – “<Device Name>” Group ....................145
Table 81: WBM “Software Uploads” Page – “Upload New Software” Group .....146
Table 82: WBM “Software Uploads” Page – “Activate New Software” Group ...146
Table 83: WBM “Configuration of Network Services” Page – “Telnet” Group ....147
Table 84: WBM “Configuration of Network Services” Page – “FTP” Group .......147
Table 85: WBM “Configuration of Network Services” Page – “FTPS” Group ....147
Table 86: WBM “Configuration of Network Services” Page – “HTTP” Group ....148
Table 87: WBM “Configuration of Network Services” Page – “HTTPS” Group ..148
Table 88: WBM “Configuration of Network Services” Page – “I/O-CHECK“ Group
................................................................................................................148
Table 89: WBM “Configuration of Network Services” Page – “OPC UA” Group 149
Table 90: WBM “Configuration of NTP Client” Page – “NTP Client Configuration”
Group ......................................................................................................150
Table 91: WBM “Configuration of PLC Runtime Services” Page – “General
Configuration” Group...............................................................................151
Table 92: WBM “Configuration of CODESYS Services” Page – “CODESYS 2
Web Server” Group .................................................................................151
Table 93: WBM “Configuration of CODESYS Services” Page – “e!RUNTIME Web
Server” Group .........................................................................................151
Table 94: WBM “SSH Server Settings” Page – “SSH Server” Group ................153
Table 95: WBM “TFTP Server” Page – “TFTP Server” Group ..........................154
Table 96: WBM “DHCP Configuration” – “DHCP Configuration Xn” Group .......155
Table 97: WBM “Configuration of DNS Service” Page – “DNS Service” Group 156
Table 98: WBM “MODBUS Services Configuration” Page – “MODBUS TCP”
Group ......................................................................................................157
Table 99: WBM “MODBUS Configuration Services” Page – “MODBUS UDP”
Group ......................................................................................................157
Table 100: WBM “Configuration of Cloud Connectivity” Page – “Software Version”
Group ......................................................................................................158
Table 101: WBM “Configuration of Cloud Connectivity” Page – “Status” Group158
Table 102: WBM “Configuration of Cloud Connectivity” Page – “Settings” Group
................................................................................................................159
Table 103: WBM “Configuration of General SNMP Parameters” Page – “General
SNMP Configuration” Group ...................................................................162
Table 104: WBM “Configuration of SNMP v1/v2c Parameters” Page – “SNMP
v1/v2c Manager Configuration” Group.....................................................163
Table 105: WBM “Configuration of SNMP v1/v2c Parameters” Page – “Actually
Configured Trap Receivers” Group .........................................................163
Table 106: WBM “Configuration of SNMP v1/v2c Parameters” Page – “Trap
Receiver n” Group(s)...............................................................................164
Table 107: WBM “Configuration of SNMP v1/v2c Parameters” Page – “Add New
Trap Receiver” Group .............................................................................164
Table 108: WBM “Configuration of SNMP v3” Page – “Actually Configured v3
Users” Group ..........................................................................................165
Table 109: WBM “Configuration of SNMP v3 Users” Page – “v3 User n” Group(s)
................................................................................................................165
Table 110: WBM “Configuration of SNMP v3 Users” Page – “Add New v3 User”
Group ......................................................................................................166
Table 111: WBM “Diagnostic Information” Page ...............................................167
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 List of Tables 417
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 112: WBM “Configuration of internal 3G Modem” Page – “SIM
Authentication” Group .............................................................................168
Table 113: WBM “Configuration of internal 3G Modem” Page – “Mobile Network
Configuration” Group...............................................................................169
Table 114: WBM “Configuration of internal 3G Modem” Page – “Provider List”
Group ......................................................................................................170
Table 115: WBM “Configuration of internal 3G Modem” Page – “Network
Package Service” Group .........................................................................170
Table 116: WBM “Configuration of internal 3G Modem” Page – “Upload and
activate new Modem Software” Group ....................................................171
Table 117: WBM “Configuration of OpenVPN and IPsec” Page – “OpenVPN”
Group ......................................................................................................172
Table 118: WBM “Configuration of OpenVPN and IPsec” Page – “IPsec” Group
................................................................................................................172
Table 119: WBM “Configuration of OpenVPN and IPsec” Page – “Certificate
Upload” Group ........................................................................................173
Table 120: WBM “Configuration of OpenVPN and IPsec” Page – “Certificate List”
Group ......................................................................................................173
Table 121: WBM “Configuration of OpenVPN and IPsec” Page – “Private Key
List” Group ..............................................................................................173
Table 122: “Security Settings” WBM Page – “TLS Configuration” Group ..........174
Table 123: CBM Menu Structure ......................................................................177
Table 124: “Information” Menu .........................................................................180
Table 125: “Information” > “Controller Details” Submenu..................................180
Table 126: “Information” > “Network Details” Submenu ....................................181
Table 127: “PLC Runtime” Menu ......................................................................182
Table 128: “PLC Runtime” > “Information” Submenu........................................182
Table 129: “PLC Runtime” > “Information” > “Runtime Version” Submenu .......183
Table 130: “PLC Runtime” > “Information” > “Webserver Version” Submenu ...183
Table 131: “PLC Runtime” > “Information” > “State” Submenu .........................183
Table 132: “PLC Runtime” > “Information” > “Number of Tasks” Submenu ......184
Table 133: “PLC Runtime” > “Information” > “Project Details” Submenu...........184
Table 134: “PLC Runtime” > “Information” > “Tasks” Submenu ........................184
Table 135: “PLC Runtime” > “Information” > “Tasks” > “Task n” Submenu .......185
Table 136: “PLC Runtime” > “General Configuration” Submenu .......................185
Table 137: “PLC Runtime” > “General Configuration” > “PLC Runtime Version”
Submenu ................................................................................................186
Table 138: “PLC Runtime” > “General Configuration” > “Home Dir On SD Card”
Submenu ................................................................................................186
Table 139: “PLC Runtime” > “WebVisu” Submenu ...........................................187
Table 140: “Networking” Menu .........................................................................188
Table 141: “Networking” > “Host/Domain Name” Submenu ..............................188
Table 142: “Networking” > “Hostname” Submenu ............................................189
Table 143: “Networking” > “Host/Domain Name” > “Domain Name” Submenu .189
Table 144: “Networking” > “TCP/IP” Submenu .................................................189
Table 145: “Networking” > “IP Address” Submenu ...........................................190
Table 146: “Networking” > “TCP/IP” > “IP Address” Submenu > “Xn” ...............190
Table 147: “Networking” > “TCP/IP” > “Default Gateway” Submenu .................191
Table 148: “Networking” > “TCP/IP” > “Default Gateway” > “Default Gateway n”
Submenu ................................................................................................191
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
418 List of Tables WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 149: “Networking” > “TCP/IP” > “DNS Server” Submenu ........................192
Table 150: “Networking” > “Ethernet” Submenu ...............................................192
Table 151: “Networking” > “Ethernet” > “Switch Configuration” Submenu.........193
Table 152: “Networking” > “Ethernet” > “Ethernet Ports” Submenu ..................193
Table 153: “Networking” > “Ethernet” > “Ethernet Ports” > “Interface Xn”
Submenu ................................................................................................194
Table 154: “Firewall” Menu ...............................................................................195
Table 155: “Firewall” > “General Configuration” Submenu................................196
Table 156: “Firewall” > “General Configuration” > “Interface xxx” Submenu .....197
Table 157: “Firewall” > “MAC Address Filter” Submenu ...................................199
Table 158: “Firewall” > “MAC Address Filter” > “MAC address filter whitelist”
Submenu ................................................................................................200
Table 159: “Firewall” > “MAC Address Filter” > “MAC address filter whitelist” >
“Add new / No (n)” Submenu ...................................................................200
Table 160: “Firewall” > “User Filter” Submenu ..................................................201
Table 161: “Firewall” > “User Filter” > “Add New / No (n)” Submenu ................202
Table 162: “Clock” Menu ..................................................................................203
Table 163: “Administration” Menu.....................................................................204
Table 164: “Administration” > “Create Image” Submenu...................................205
Table 165: “Administration” > “Users” Submenu ...............................................205
Table 166: “Package Server” Menu ..................................................................206
Table 167: “Package Server” > “Firmware Backup” Menu ................................206
Table 168: “Package Server” > “Firmware Backup” > “Auto Update Feature”
Menu .......................................................................................................207
Table 169: “Package Server” > “Firmware Backup” > “Auto Update Feature”
Menu .......................................................................................................207
Table 170: “Package Server” > “Firmware Restore” Menu ...............................208
Table 171: “Package Server” > “Firmware Restore” > “Select Package” Menu.208
Table 172: “Package Server” > “System Partition” Submenu ...........................209
Table 173: “Mass Storage” Menu .....................................................................210
Table 174: “Mass Storage” > “SD Card” Menu .................................................210
Table 175: “Ports and Services” Menu .............................................................212
Table 176: “Ports and Services” > “Telnet” Submenu .......................................213
Table 177: “Ports and Services” > “FTP” Submenu ..........................................213
Table 178: “Ports and Services” > “FTPS” Submenu........................................214
Table 179: “Ports and Services” > “HTTP” Submenu .......................................214
Table 180: “Ports and Services” > “HTTPS” Submenu .....................................215
Table 181: “Ports and Services” > “NTP” Submenu..........................................215
Table 182: “Ports and Services” > “SSH” Submenu .........................................216
Table 183: “Ports and Services” > “TFTP” Submenu ........................................216
Table 184: “Ports and Services” > “DHCPD” Submenu ....................................217
Table 185: “Ports and Services” > “DHCPD” > “Xn” Submenu .........................217
Table 186: “Ports and Services” > “DNS” Submenu .........................................218
Table 187: “Ports and Services” > “IOCHECK PORT” Submenu ......................219
Table 188: “Ports and Services” > “Modbus TCP” Submenu ............................219
Table 189: “Ports and Services” > “Modbus UDP” Submenu ............................220
Table 190: “Ports and Services” > “PLC Runtime Services” Submenu .............220
Table 191: “Ports and Services” > “PLC Runtime Services” > “CODESYS 2”
Submenu ................................................................................................221
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 List of Tables 419
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 192: “Ports and Services” > “PLC Runtime Services” > “e!RUNTIME”
Submenu ................................................................................................222
Table 193: “Ports and Services” > “Firewall Status” Submenu..........................223
Table 194: “SNMP” Menu .................................................................................224
Table 195: “SNMP” > “General SNMP Configuration” Submenu ......................224
Table 196: “SNMP” > “SNMP v1/v2c Manager Configuration” Submenu ..........225
Table 197: “SNMP” > “SNMP v1/v2c Trap Receiver Configuration” Submenu..225
Table 198: “SNMP” > “SNMP v3 Configuration” Submenu ...............................226
Table 199: “SNMP” > “(Secure )SNMP firewalling” Submenu ...........................227
Table 200: Syntax of Logical Addresses...........................................................248
Table 201: Events ............................................................................................259
Table 202: Access to the Process Images of the Input and Output Data – Local
Bus .........................................................................................................265
Table 203: Access to the Process Images of the Input and Output Data –
MODBUS ................................................................................................266
Table 204: Access to the Process Images of the Input and Output Data –
CANopen ................................................................................................266
Table 205: Access to the Process Images of the Input and Output Data –
PROFIBUS .............................................................................................266
Table 206: Access to the Process Images of the Input and Output Data – Flags
................................................................................................................267
Table 207: Arrangement of the I/O Modules for the Addressing Example.........267
Table 208: Addressing Example .......................................................................267
Table 209: Local Bus (KBus) Settings ..............................................................274
Table 210: Errors and Remedies ......................................................................284
Table 211: CODESYS V3 Priorities ..................................................................288
Table 212: MODBUS Settings ..........................................................................292
Table 213: MODBUS TCP Settings ..................................................................293
Table 214: MODBUS UDP Settings .................................................................293
Table 215: MODBUS RTU Settings..................................................................294
Table 216: MODBUS Mapping for Read Bit Services FC1, FC2 .......................299
Table 217: MODBUS Mapping for Write Bit Services FC5, FC15 .....................300
Table 218: MODBUS Mapping for Read Register Services FC3, FC4, FC23 ...301
Table 219: MODBUS Mapping for Write Register Services FC6, FC16, FC22,
FC23 .......................................................................................................303
Table 220: WAGO MODBUS Registers............................................................305
Table 221: Watchdog Commands ....................................................................311
Table 222: Watchdog Status ............................................................................312
Table 223: Watchdog Configuration .................................................................313
Table 224: Watchdog Operation Modes ...........................................................314
Table 225: Diagnostics for the Error Server......................................................316
Table 226: WAGO MODBUS Registers............................................................320
Table 227: Watchdog Commands ....................................................................324
Table 228: Watchdog Status ............................................................................325
Table 229: Watchdog Configuration .................................................................326
Table 230: System Power Supply Diagnistics ..................................................331
Table 231: Field-Side Supply Diagnostics ........................................................331
Table 232: Diagnostics via CON LED...............................................................332
Table 233: Diagnostics via SYS LED ...............................................................333
Table 234: Diagnostics RUN LED ....................................................................334
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
420 List of Tables WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 235: RUN LED Diagnostics ....................................................................335
Table 236: Diagnostics I/O LED .......................................................................336
Table 237: MS-LED Diagnostics ......................................................................337
Table 238: Diagnostics via NET LED ...............................................................338
Table 239: Diagnostics via Signal Quality LEDs ...............................................339
Table 240: Signal Quality Meaning ...................................................................339
Table 241: Overview of Error Codes, I/O LED ..................................................343
Table 242: Error Code 1, Explanation of Blink Codes and Procedures for
Troubleshooting ......................................................................................344
Table 243: Error Code 2, Explanation of Blink Codes and Procedures for
Troubleshooting ......................................................................................345
Table 244: Error Code 3, Explanation of Blink Codes and Procedures for
Troubleshooting ......................................................................................346
Table 245: Error Code 4, Explanation of Blink Codes and Procedures for
Troubleshooting ......................................................................................347
Table 246: Error Code 5, Explanation of Blink Codes and Procedures for
Troubleshooting ......................................................................................347
Table 247: Error Code 9, Explanation of Blink Codes and Procedures for
Troubleshooting ......................................................................................347
Table 248: Overview of MS-LED Error Codes ..................................................348
Table 249: Error Code 1, Explanation of Blink Codes and Procedures for
Troubleshooting ......................................................................................348
Table 250: 1 Channel Digital Input Module with Diagnostics ............................357
Table 251: 2 Channel Digital Input Modules .....................................................357
Table 252: 2 Channel Digital Input Module with Diagnostics ............................357
Table 253: 2 Channel Digital Input Module with Diagnostics and Output Process
Data ........................................................................................................358
Table 254: 4 Channel Digital Input Modules .....................................................358
Table 255: 8 Channel Digital Input Modules .....................................................358
Table 256: 8 Channel Digital Input Module PTC with Diagnostics and Output
Process Data ..........................................................................................359
Table 257: 16 Channel Digital Input Modules ...................................................360
Table 258: 1 Channel Digital Output Module with Input Process Data ..............361
Table 259: 2 Channel Digital Output Modules ..................................................361
Table 260: 2 Channel Digital Input Modules with Diagnostics and Input Process
Data ........................................................................................................362
Table 261: 2 Channel Digital Input Modules with Diagnostics and Input Process
Data 75x-506 ..........................................................................................362
Table 262: 4 Channel Digital Output Modules ..................................................363
Table 263: 4 Channel Digital Output Modules with Diagnostics and Input Process
Data ........................................................................................................363
Table 264: 8 Channel Digital Output Module ....................................................363
Table 265: 8 Channel Digital Output Modules with Diagnostics and Input Process
Data ........................................................................................................364
Table 266: 16 Channel Digital Output Modules ................................................364
Table 267: 8 Channel Digital Input/Output Modules .........................................365
Table 268: 1 Channel Analog Input Modules ....................................................366
Table 269: 2 Channel Analog Input Modules ....................................................366
Table 270: 4 Channel Analog Input Modules ....................................................367
Table 271: 3-Phase Power Measurement Module ............................................368
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 List of Tables 421
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 272: 8 Channel Analog Input Modules ....................................................368
Table 273: 2 Channel Analog Output Modules .................................................369
Table 274: 4 Channel Analog Output Modules .................................................369
Table 275: Counter Modules 750-404, (and all variations except of /000-005),
753-404, (and variation /000-003) ...........................................................370
Table 276: Counter Modules 750-404/000-005 ................................................371
Table 277: Counter Modules 750-638, 753-638 ...............................................371
Table 278: Pulse Width Modules 750-511, /xxx-xxx .........................................372
Table 279: Serial Interface Modules with Alternative Data Format....................372
Table 280: Serial Interface Modules with Standard Data Format ......................373
Table 281: Data Exchange Module ..................................................................373
Table 282: SSI Transmitter Interface Modules .................................................374
Table 283: Incremental Encoder Interface Modules 750-631/000-004, --010, -
011 ..........................................................................................................374
Table 284: Incremental Encoder Interface Modules 750-634............................375
Table 285: Incremental Encoder Interface Modules 750-637............................375
Table 286: Digital Pulse Interface Modules 750-635 ........................................376
Table 287: DC-Drive Controller 750-636 ..........................................................376
Table 288: Stepper Controller RS 422 / 24 V / 20 mA 750-670 ........................377
Table 289: RTC Module 750-640 .....................................................................378
Table 290: DALI/DSI Master Module 750-641 ..................................................378
Table 291: Overview of Input Process Image in the "Easy" Mode ....................380
Table 292: Overview of the Output Process Image in the "Easy" Mode“...........380
Table 293: EnOcean Radio Receiver 750-642 .................................................381
Table 294: MP Bus Master Module 750-643 ....................................................381
Table 295: Bluetooth® RF-Transceiver 750-644 ...............................................382
Table 296: Vibration Velocity/Bearing Condition Monitoring VIB I/O 750-645 ...383
Table 297: KNX/EIB/TP1 Module 753-646 .......................................................384
Table 298: AS-interface Master Module 750-655 .............................................385
Table 299: System Modules with Diagnostics 750-610, -611............................386
Table 300: Binary Space Module 750-622 (with Behavior Like 2 Channel Digital
Input).......................................................................................................386
Table 301: CODESYS System Libraries ..........................................................387
Table 302: Possible Macros for File Access .....................................................389
Table 303: Possible Macros for File Access .....................................................390
Table 304: Input Variable “DEVICENUMBER”..................................................391
Table 305: Description of the Configuration Scripts for “Information” ................392
Table 306: Description of the Configuration Scripts for “CODESYS” ................393
Table 307: Description of the Configuration Scripts for “Networking - Host/Domain
Name” .....................................................................................................394
Table 308: Description of the Configuration Scripts for “Networking - TCP/IP” .394
Table 309: Description of the Configuration Scripts for “Networking - ETHERNET”
................................................................................................................396
Table 310: Description of the Configuration Scripts for “NTP” ..........................397
Table 311: Description of the Configuration Scripts for “Clock”.........................398
Table 312: Description of the Configuration Scripts for "Administration" ...........398
Table 313: Description of Configuration Scripts for “Package Server” ..............399
Table 314: Description of Configuration Scripts for “Ports and Services” –
“Network Services ...................................................................................400
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
422 List of Tables WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Table 315: Description of Configuration Scripts for “Ports and Services” – “PLC
Runtime Services” ...................................................................................401
Table 316: Description of Configuration Scripts for “Ports and Services” –
“SSH/TFTP” ............................................................................................404
Table 317: Description of Configuration Scripts for “SNMP” .............................405
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 423
750-8207 PFC200 CS 2ETH RS 3G
Manual
Version 1.3.0, valid from FW Version 02.08.25(11)
WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH & Co. KG
Postfach 2880 • 32385 Minden
Hansastraße 27 • 32423 Minden
Phone: 0571/887 – 0
Fax: 0571/887 – 169
E-Mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.wago.com